WO2022242489A1 - Beamforming method and related apparatus - Google Patents

Beamforming method and related apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022242489A1
WO2022242489A1 PCT/CN2022/091684 CN2022091684W WO2022242489A1 WO 2022242489 A1 WO2022242489 A1 WO 2022242489A1 CN 2022091684 W CN2022091684 W CN 2022091684W WO 2022242489 A1 WO2022242489 A1 WO 2022242489A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
channel
network device
antenna
antennas
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/091684
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杨非
江成
赵治林
刘伟
陈志君
李雪茹
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022242489A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022242489A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0404Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas the mobile station comprising multiple antennas, e.g. to provide uplink diversity
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/28Cell structures using beam steering
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the communication field, and in particular, to a beamforming method and a related device.
  • 5G terminals generally support uplink 2 transmit (TX) channels for the 5G new radio (NR) time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) frequency band.
  • TX uplink 2 transmit
  • NR new radio
  • TDD time division duplex
  • a terminal with multiple uplink TX channels can use beamforming (BF) technology to compensate the air interface channel phase difference of multiple antennas, so as to obtain BF combining gain and improve the receiving strength and signal-to-noise ratio of uplink signals.
  • BF beamforming
  • the 2TX channel can achieve a BF gain of 3dB
  • the 4TX channel can achieve a BF gain of 6dB.
  • the present application provides a beamforming method and a related device, which can make full use of multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of a terminal to improve uplink transmission performance and achieve higher BF gain.
  • the present application provides a beamforming method, which is applied to a terminal.
  • the terminal includes A TX channels, and the above-mentioned A TX channels correspond to Y antennas, and A and Y are positive integers.
  • the method includes: the terminal passes the above The Y antenna polls the network device with a single antenna, and the sending antenna polls the antenna switching-sounding reference signal (AS-SRS), and the AS-SRS is used by the network device to estimate the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas; the terminal Receiving the hybrid beamforming (hybrid beamforming, HBF) configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode is determined by the network device based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas; the terminal is based on the HBF configuration information, Determine the uplink target sending method.
  • HBF hybrid beamforming
  • the terminal polls the network device through a single antenna to send AS-SRS, and the network device performs uplink channel estimation based on the received AS-SRS, and determines the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal based on the uplink channel estimation result, and The HBF configuration information is fed back through the CSI to indicate the target transmission mode to the terminal.
  • the multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of the terminal can be fully utilized to improve uplink transmission performance and achieve higher BF gain.
  • the network equipment adaptively selects the uplink target transmission mode for the terminal through the uplink channel estimation of each antenna of the terminal, without relying on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, applicable to FDD frequency band and TDD frequency band, and can also be adaptively handled Various practical channel environments.
  • the above HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the digital beamforming (digital beamforming, DBF) of the B TX channels for uplink transmission in the above A TX channels, and the above B TX channels ), the D antennas for uplink transmission among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel in the above B TX channels and/or the analog beamforming (analog beamforming, ABF) analog phase shift of the above D antennas value, the first TX channel is any TX channel in the above B TX channels, and B, C, and D are positive integers.
  • the terminal before the above-mentioned terminal polls the network equipment with a single antenna through the above-mentioned Y antennas to send the AS-SRS, the terminal further includes: the terminal sends a first message to the network equipment, and the first message uses For reporting the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal, the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal are used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
  • the terminal before the above-mentioned terminal polls the network device through the above-mentioned Y antennas to send the AS-SRS with a single antenna, the terminal further includes: the terminal receiving the AS-SRS resource of the terminal sent by the network device Configuration information, AS-SRS resource configuration information is determined by the network device based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal; the terminal polls the network device with a single antenna through the above-mentioned Y antennas, and sends the AS-SRS to the sending antenna in turn, Specifically, the terminal polls and sends the AS-SRS to the network device with a single antenna through the above-mentioned Y antennas on the AS-SRS resource.
  • the terminal before the terminal receives the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, the terminal further includes: the terminal sends a second message to the network device, and the second message is used to report the TX channels supported by the terminal The maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
  • the maximum transmit power allowed by the protocol may be different for different frequency bands, and the maximum transmit power supported by different TX channels may also be different.
  • Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals and frequency bands, so that network devices can target different The power capability of the power adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the power capability.
  • the terminal before the terminal receives the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, the terminal further includes: the terminal sends a third message to the network device, and the third message is used to report the phase-shifting profile supported by the terminal bit, the phase shifting gear supported by the terminal is used for the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode, and the phase shifting gear includes ABF phase shifting gear and/or DBF phase shifting gear.
  • the supported ABF phase shifting gear and/or DBF phase shifting gear may be different.
  • Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals, so that network devices can target different The phase shift gear adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the phase shift gear.
  • the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above Y antennas, the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal, the phase shifting gear supported by the terminal, and the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal are used by the network device to determine the terminal
  • the equivalent channel gains in various uplink transmission modes, and the uplink transmission mode with the largest equivalent channel gain is the target transmission mode of the terminal.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the first message carries an index of the configuration type of the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the above-mentioned A TX channels, and the second message carries an index of the power capability type of the terminal.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase-shifting precisions of the phase-shifting gears, and the third message carries the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears of the terminal, and the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears includes The phase shift accuracy of the ABF phase shift gear and/or the phase shift accuracy of the DBF phase shift gear.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two types of phase shifting gears
  • the third message carries the index of the phase shifting gear type of the terminal
  • the index of the phase shifting gear type includes the ABF phase shifting gear The index of the type and/or the index of the DBF shifting gear type.
  • the present application provides a beamforming method, which is applied to network equipment, and the method includes: the network equipment receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, and the terminal includes A TX channels, The above-mentioned A TX channels correspond to the above-mentioned Y antennas, and A and Y are positive integers; the network device estimates the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the first antenna based on the AS-SRS sent by the first antenna among the above-mentioned Y antennas, and the first antenna is Any one of the above-mentioned Y antennas; the network device determines HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas; the network device sends the HBF configuration information to the terminal.
  • the terminal polls the network device through a single antenna to send AS-SRS, and the network device performs uplink channel estimation based on the received AS-SRS, and determines the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal based on the uplink channel estimation result, and The HBF configuration information is fed back through the CSI to indicate the target transmission mode to the terminal.
  • the multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of the terminal can be fully utilized to improve uplink transmission performance and achieve higher BF gain.
  • the network equipment adaptively selects the uplink target transmission mode for the terminal through the uplink channel estimation of each antenna of the terminal, without relying on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, applicable to FDD frequency band and TDD frequency band, and can also be adaptively handled Various practical channel environments.
  • the above HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the B TX channels for uplink transmission in the above A TX channels, the DBF digital phase shift values of the above B TX channels, the above B TX channels Among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel in the TX channel, the D antennas for uplink transmission and/or the ABF analog phase shift value of the above D antennas, the first TX channel is any TX channel among the above B TX channels.
  • the network device before the network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, the network device further includes: the network device receives the first message sent by the terminal; the network device determines the terminal's address based on the first message TX channel and antenna configuration, the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
  • the network device before the above network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, the network device further includes: the network device determines the AS-SRS resource configuration of the terminal based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal information; the network device sends AS-SRS resource configuration information to the terminal; the above-mentioned network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, specifically includes: the network device receives the terminal on the AS-SRS resource through the above-mentioned The Y antennas poll and send the AS-SRS with a single antenna.
  • the network device before the network device determines the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, the network device further includes: the network device receives the second message sent by the terminal; the network device The maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal is determined based on the second message, and the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
  • the maximum transmit power allowed by the protocol may be different for different frequency bands, and the maximum transmit power supported by different TX channels may also be different.
  • Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals and frequency bands, so that network devices can target different The power capability of the power adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the power capability.
  • the network device before the network device determines the HBF configuration information of the terminal's target transmission mode based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, the network device further includes: the network device receives the third message sent by the terminal; the network device Determine the phase-shifting gear supported by the terminal based on the third message.
  • the phase-shifting gear supported by the terminal is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
  • the phase-shifting gear includes ABF phase-shifting gear and/or DBF phase-shifting gear bit.
  • the supported ABF phase shifting gear and/or DBF phase shifting gear may be different.
  • Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals, so that network devices can target different The phase shift gear adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the phase shift gear.
  • the above-mentioned network device determines the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas, which specifically includes: based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas,
  • the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal, the phase shift gear supported by the terminal, and the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal determine the equivalent channel gain of the terminal in various uplink transmission modes, and determine the maximum equivalent channel gain
  • the uplink transmission mode is the target transmission mode of the terminal, and the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode is acquired.
  • the above network device determines the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above Y antennas, which specifically includes: the network device based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal and the terminal support The phase-shifting position of the first codebook set applicable to the terminal is determined; the first codebook set includes Y codewords, and the y-th symbol of each codeword in the first codebook set is used to represent the above-mentioned Y root The HBF weight corresponding to the y-th antenna in the antenna; based on the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal, the power correction is performed on the first codebook set to obtain the corrected second codebook set, and the second codebook set The total transmission power corresponding to each codeword is less than or equal to the maximum transmission power supported by the terminal, and the sum of the transmission powers of the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel in each codeword of the second codebook set is less than or equal to The
  • the HBF configuration information is an index of the first codeword in the codebook set.
  • the phase difference between the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel is the phase shift gear of the ABF supported by the terminal
  • the A TX channels also include the second TX channel
  • the phase difference of the two symbols corresponding to the first antenna of the first TX channel and the second YX channel is the phase shifting gear of the DBF supported by the terminal.
  • the equivalent channel gain corresponding to the codeword is the modulus square of the product vector of the codeword and the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the first message carries an index of the configuration type of the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the above-mentioned A TX channels, and the second message carries an index of the power capability type of the terminal.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase-shifting precisions of the phase-shifting gears, and the third message carries the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears of the terminal, and the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears includes The phase shift accuracy of the ABF phase shift gear and/or the phase shift accuracy of the DBF phase shift gear.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two indexes of phase shifting gear types
  • the third message carries the index of the phase shifting gear type of the terminal
  • the index of phase shifting gears includes ABF phase shifting gear Index of bits and/or index of DBF shifting bins.
  • the first codebook set is a four-port uplink
  • the precoding matrix indicates the TPMI codebook; when the terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 4 antennas, and the phase shifting accuracy of the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear are both 90°, the first codebook set is a four-port TPMI codebook; when the terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 2 antennas, and the phase-shifting accuracy of the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear are both 90°, the first codebook set is a two-port TPMI codebook.
  • the present application provides a communication device, including one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, cause the communication device to perform The method mentioned in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
  • the present application provides a communications device, including one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, cause the communication device to perform The method mentioned in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions are run on the electronic device, cause the communication device to perform the method mentioned in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method mentioned in any possible implementation manner of any of the above aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the principles of a multi-antenna channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • 3A to 3D are schematic structural diagrams of the transceiver framework provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a transceiver framework provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5A to 5C are schematic diagrams of the sending framework provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a codeword provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7A is a flow chart of the beamforming method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7B and FIG. 7C are gain schematic diagrams of uplink beamforming provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 10 may include at least one network device 100 (only one is shown) and one or more terminals 200 (only one is shown) connected to the network device 100 .
  • the network device 100 can send downlink data to the terminal 200 through one or more antennas through the downlink (Downlink, DL), and the terminal 200 can also send downlink data to the network device 100 through the uplink (Uplink, UL) through one or more antennas. Send uplink data.
  • the network device 100 may also be called a network device, and the terminal 200 may also be called a terminal.
  • the network device 100 involved in the embodiment of the present application is an access device that is wirelessly connected to the communication system and has a wireless transceiver function.
  • the device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), wireless Network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB , or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), next-generation Node B (next Generation Node B, gNB), transmission point (TRP or TP) in the 5G NR network, or constitute gNB or transmission point network nodes and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific wireless access technology and specific device form adopted by the network device 100 .
  • the terminal 200 involved in this embodiment of the present application may be a terminal equipped with iOS, Android, Microsoft or other operating systems.
  • the terminal 200 may also be called user equipment (user equipment, UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile device, user terminal, terminal device, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • user equipment user equipment, UE
  • access terminal subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile device, user terminal, terminal device, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • the terminal 200 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, a netbook, a drone, a cellular phone, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) device, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) device, wearable device, vehicle-mounted device and/or smart home device, etc.
  • augmented reality augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • AI artificial intelligence
  • the network device 100 and the terminal 200 can be deployed on land, including indoors, outdoors, hand-held or vehicle-mounted, they can also be deployed on water, and they can also be deployed on airplanes and artificial satellites in the air, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram of the system structure of the communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the communication system may also include other devices, for example, wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices (not shown in FIG. 1 ). out), without limitation here.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a multi-antenna channel model of the terminal 200 in a LOS scenario.
  • the terminal 200 has Y uniform linear array antennas, which are marked as antenna 0 to antenna Y-1.
  • the uplink channel matrix H UL between the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can be expressed as:
  • H UL is the number of receiving antennas of the network device 100
  • indicates the carrier wavelength
  • h y represents the uplink channel corresponding to antenna y
  • y 0,1,...,Y-1.
  • a channel may also be called an air interface channel.
  • Subband The frequency domain granularity unit of the physical layer feedback channel information.
  • the system bandwidth can be divided into several sub-bands, and the size of the sub-bands may be 4, 6 or 8 resource blocks (resource block, RB) based on different system bandwidths.
  • RB is a resource unit allocated by traffic channel resources, and occupies 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • a subband may also be called a subchannel or a frequency domain unit.
  • CSI Channel State Information is information used to estimate the characteristics of a communication link, and the process of estimating CSI is called channel estimation.
  • CSI includes but is not limited to one of precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI), rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), precoding type indicator (precoding type indicator, PTI) and channel quality information (Channel Quality Indicator, CQI) or more, and the time-frequency resources occupied by them are controlled by network devices.
  • Full-bandwidth CSI reporting The receiving terminal reports CSI for the full-bandwidth CSI occupied by the target link.
  • the above-mentioned CSI of the full bandwidth is an average of CSIs of all subbands occupied by the target link.
  • the receiving terminal reports CSI for the CSI of each sub-band occupied by the target link.
  • the basic principle of BF is: when the sending end uses multiple antennas to send signals, it can generate directional beams by adjusting the weighting coefficients of each antenna, so that the signals sent by each antenna in the multi-antennas can be coherently superimposed when they arrive at the receiving end, improving The received strength and signal-to-noise ratio of the uplink signal are improved, and the BF gain is obtained.
  • Weighting coefficients also known as weights, refer to the amplitude and/or phase used by the antenna to transmit the signal. Adjusting the amplitude and/or phase used by the antennas may be referred to as weighting. Coherence means that the signals sent by multiple antennas can reach the receiving end according to the same phase or similar phase. Phase shifting refers to adjusting the phase used when multiple antennas transmit signals.
  • the channels corresponding to the Y transmitting antennas at the transmitting end are completely correlated, and there is only a phase difference caused by a wave path difference of wireless signals.
  • BF technology can be used to appropriately phase-shift the signals transmitted by the above-mentioned Y antennas.
  • the above-mentioned BF Technology can make the received signal obtain (10lgY) dB BF gain.
  • the frequency range (frequency range, FR) of 5G NR includes FR1 and FR2.
  • one TX channel corresponds to one antenna; theoretically, for a terminal with 2TX channels and two antennas, the BF gain is (10lg2)dB, which is 3dB; for a terminal with 4TX channels and For a terminal with 4 antennas, the BF gain is (10lg4)dB, that is, 6dB.
  • the channels corresponding to the Y transmitting antennas are only partially correlated, and there are amplitude differences in addition to phase differences.
  • the proportion of the largest characteristic component of the channel in the total channel power is recorded as ⁇ , ⁇ >1/N.
  • the maximum characteristic direction of the channel is used as the BF sending weight to carry out weighted sending on the uplink signal, and the obtained BF gain is (10lg ⁇ N)dB. It can be seen that the higher the channel correlation between antennas, the larger the ratio ⁇ of the largest eigencomponent, and the larger the BF gain.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic structural diagram of a transceiver framework of a terminal 200 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver framework of the terminal 200 can be divided into three parts: baseband, radio frequency (radio frequency, RF) and antenna.
  • the baseband may include a modulator-demodulator (modem) module, and the modem module is used to process the baseband signal.
  • the radio frequency may include a radio frequency integrated circuit (radio frequency integrated circuit, RFIC) and a radio frequency front end (radio frequency front end, RFFE), and the RFIC and the RFFE are used to process radio frequency signals.
  • Antennas are used to receive signals or transmit signals.
  • each port of the baseband is uniquely connected to one radio frequency channel, and one radio frequency channel may be connected to one or more physical antennas.
  • the transmission port (port) defined by 3GPP refers to a channel that can independently transmit a signal (the channel can be called a transmission channel (TX)), and the receiving port refers to a channel that can independently receive a signal (the channel can be called a reception channel RX).
  • TX transmission channel
  • RX reception channel
  • the concept of a port is usually used in the baseband field, and the concept of a channel is usually used in the radio frequency field. In this article, a channel is used as an example for illustration.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of TX channels, the number of RX channels, and the number of antennas of the terminal 200 .
  • the transceiver frame of the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 2 includes 2 TX channels (ie TX0 and TX1), 4 RX channels (ie RX0 to RX3), and 4 antennas (ie antenna 1 to antenna 4).
  • one TX channel corresponds to one antenna
  • one RX channel corresponds to one antenna
  • one TX channel corresponds to two antennas
  • one RX channel corresponds to Compatible with 2 antennas.
  • the terminal 200 can support various frequency bands in 2G-5G communication, and different frequency bands can correspond to different antenna configurations.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of antennas for each frequency band.
  • the frequency range of 5G NR includes FR1 and FR2.
  • the Sub6G and Sub3G frequency bands in 5G FR1 can usually correspond to 4 antennas respectively.
  • a terminal configured with a TX channels and b antennas is referred to as a T/b configured terminal.
  • a terminal with 2 TX channels and 4 antennas is called a 2T/4 configured terminal.
  • BF can include: ABF, DBF and HBF. As shown in FIG. 3A , locations where BF occurs may include baseband and/or radio frequency.
  • ABF refers to the BF implemented by weighting the multiple antennas corresponding to the TX channel through radio frequency control, that is, weighting the analog signals corresponding to each antenna in the analog domain through RFIC and RFFE.
  • the hardware structure of ABF is simple, and the realization cost is low.
  • the beams used in ABF may be referred to as analog beams.
  • ABF can adjust the phase of the analog beam, but not the amplitude of the analog beam.
  • ABF uses a phase shifter to adjust the phase of the analog beam.
  • the number of adjustable phases is limited and depends on the implementation of the phase shifter; ABF can only shift the phase of the full bandwidth of the analog signal, and cannot perform sub-bands for different sub-bands. Phase shifting with stages.
  • the terminal 200 has a TX0 channel, and the TX0 channel is connected to antenna 0 and antenna 1 .
  • the terminal 200 may weight the analog signals corresponding to the two antennas connected to the TX0 channel to implement uplink ABF.
  • DBF refers to the BF implemented by weighting multiple TX channels through baseband control, that is, the digital signal corresponding to each TX channel is weighted in the digital domain through the modem.
  • the DBF has high requirements on the processing capability of the port, and the power consumption and hardware implementation cost are relatively high.
  • the beams used in DBF may be called digital beams.
  • DBF can adjust the phase of the digital beam, and can also adjust the amplitude of the digital beam.
  • the baseband adjusts the phase of the digital beam through software, and the adjustable phase can be any value, that is, the accuracy of the phase adjustment is very high; DBF can not only perform full-bandwidth phase shift for digital signals, but also perform phase shifts for different sub-bands. Phase shifting at the subband level.
  • the terminal 200 has two TX channels, namely TX0 channel and TX1 channel, TX0 channel is connected to one or more antennas (such as antenna 0), and TX1 channel is also connected to one or more antennas (eg Antenna 1).
  • the terminal 200 may weight the digital signals corresponding to the above two TX channels to implement uplink DBF.
  • the terminal 200 has only one TX channel, DBF cannot be realized; if one TX channel of the terminal 200 (such as the TX0 channel shown in FIG. 3C ) is only connected to one antenna, then ABF cannot be realized for this TX channel.
  • HBF refers to the BF implemented by integrating ABF and DBF, that is, after weighting multiple TX channels through baseband control, and then weighting multiple antennas corresponding to the TX channel through radio frequency control.
  • the terminal 200 has two TX channels, that is, a TX0 channel and a TX1 channel.
  • the TX0 channel is connected to multiple antennas (such as antenna 0 and antenna 1), and the TX1 channel is also connected to multiple antennas ( For example Antenna 2 and Antenna 3).
  • the terminal 200 can weight the digital signals corresponding to the above two TX channels to realize uplink DBF; the terminal 200 can also weight the analog signals corresponding to the two antennas connected to the TX0 channel to realize the uplink ABF of the TX0 channel; the terminal 200 can also The analog signals corresponding to the two antennas connected to the TX1 channel are weighted to realize the uplink ABF of the TX1 channel.
  • the phase adjustment amount of the analog signal in ABF is referred to as the analog phase shift value
  • the ABF weight indicates the analog phase shift value of each antenna
  • the phase adjustment amount of the digital signal in the DBF is referred to as the digital phase shift value
  • the DBF weight indicates the digital phase shift value of each TX channel.
  • FIG. 3A to FIG. 3D are only schematic diagrams of an exemplary transceiving framework provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the transceiving framework may also include more or less hardware, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the transceiving frame diagrams of the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 3B to FIG. 3D may also include one or more RX channels (not shown in the figure).
  • a sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) is a reference signal used to measure an uplink channel.
  • the network device 100 may perform uplink channel estimation based on the SRS sent by the terminal 200 to obtain channel state information (channel state information, CSI), thereby facilitating uplink resource scheduling.
  • the current communication protocol (for example, NR protocol) configures a variety of functions for the SRS.
  • the functions of the SRS usually include: determining the transmission mode of the physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) based on the codebook, and determining the non-codebook PUSCH The transmission mode, antenna switching (antenna switching) function and management beam, etc.
  • the terminal 200 needs to transmit SRS through antenna switching (also called antenna polling).
  • antenna switching also called antenna polling
  • AS-SRS the SRS transmitted through antenna switching
  • AS-SRS resource the SRS transmitted through antenna switching.
  • the terminal 200 will report the number of TX channels and antennas supported by the terminal 200 to the network device 100, and accordingly, the network device 100 configures AS-SRS resources for the terminal 200 according to the number of TX channels and antennas, so that the terminal 200 AS-SRS is transmitted on AS-SRS resources.
  • the resource granularity of AS-SRS resources includes but not limited to time domain (such as time slot, subframe, symbol, etc.), frequency domain (subcarrier, bandwidth, RB, etc.), code domain (such as pilot frequency, training sequence, synchronization sequence, etc. ), airspace (e.g. transmit antenna, receive antenna, beam, etc.).
  • a beamforming solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is specifically introduced below.
  • the 3rd generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) protocol defines the uplink coherent codebooks corresponding to the 2TX channel and the 4TX channel respectively, see section 6.3.1.5 in the protocol 38.211.
  • a codebook is a pre-defined quantized phase shift value.
  • the terminal 200 may use the above-mentioned uplink coherent codebook to implement uplink BF.
  • the beamforming method is simply referred to as Solution 1 in the following embodiments.
  • the terminal 200 and the network device 100 may exchange capability information to determine that both devices support the uplink coherent codebook specified in the protocol.
  • the terminal 200 can send an uplink reference signal to the network device 100; the network device 100 performs uplink channel estimation according to the uplink reference signal sent by the terminal 200, and determines the target codeword in the uplink coherent codebook; the network device 100 sends the target codeword to the terminal 200
  • Codeword index the terminal 200 determines the target codeword according to the codeword index sent by the network device 100, and shifts the phases of signals of multiple TX channels according to the target codeword to perform uplink BF transmission.
  • terminal 200 generally supports 2TX channels.
  • the terminal 200 due to issues such as radio frequency device cost, occupied area, and power consumption, the terminal 200 generally does not support 4TX channels.
  • the network device 100 will select a 2-antenna weight to feed back to the terminal 200 according to the channel estimation corresponding to the 2 TX channels.
  • the protocol does not support the network device 100 to select a 4-antenna weight. Feedback is given to the terminal 200. Therefore, in this solution, the terminal 200 configured with 4 antennas cannot achieve a higher BF gain.
  • the terminal 200 realizes the mapping from 2 TX channels to 4 antennas by itself, depending on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, which requires an increase in hardware costs, and also requires baseband software to increase the calculation of the above mapping relationship.
  • this solution depends on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, this solution is only applicable to the TDD frequency band, not to the FDD frequency band.
  • the uplink BF gain of the terminal 200 with two TX channels is at most 3dB, and a higher BF gain cannot be achieved.
  • the uplink coherent codebook defined in the agreement has a relatively coarse quantization granularity, and currently includes four groups of phase-shifting gears ⁇ 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° ⁇ . If the wave length difference between the antennas corresponding to the TX channel is not the above four phases, the theoretical maximum gain will not be obtained.
  • one TX channel or RX channel can drive multiple antennas to realize uplink ABF.
  • a special beam polling time slot is set in the communication protocol of FR2, which is used for the terminal to traverse multiple analog beams.
  • the terminal 200 may use preset several beam polling to select a target analog beam, so as to realize uplink ABF.
  • the beamforming method in subsequent embodiments is referred to as scheme two for short.
  • one TX channel (such as TX0 channel) and RX channel (such as RX0 channel) of terminal 200 is connected to a multi-antenna array controlled by a phase-shifting network, and the Modem of terminal 200 controls the phase-shifting network to Polling among several simulated beams set up.
  • the Modem of the terminal 200 selects the analog beam with the highest received power received by the RX0 channel for the subsequent uplink ABF according to the channel estimation corresponding to each analog beam; if it is the FDD frequency band, the base station determines that the terminal 200 uses the TX0 channel to transmit Among the pilots, the simulated beam corresponding to the pilot with the strongest uplink received power is fed back to the terminal 200, and the terminal 200 uses the simulated beam to perform subsequent uplink ABF.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a transceiver framework of a terminal 200 supporting 5G FR1.
  • the TX0 channel and the RX0 channel are connected to a multi-antenna array controlled by a phase-shifting network.
  • the multi-antenna array includes antenna 0 and antenna 1.
  • the Modem controls the above-mentioned phase-shifting network to poll among preset analog beams to select Target analog beam for uplink transmission.
  • the downlink of the terminal 200 usually supports 4 RX channels, but in the ABF technology, 1 RX channel requires at least 2 antennas.
  • 1 RX channel requires at least 2 antennas.
  • a terminal with 1 TX channel needs to include 1 phase-shifting network and at least 5 antennas; a terminal with 2 TX channels needs to include 2 phase-shifting network and at least 6 antennas.
  • This solution requires additional antennas, which will lead to increased hardware costs, and is limited by the size of the terminal, the area occupied by radio frequency devices, and power consumption. It is very difficult to add antennas in practical applications.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a beamforming method, which is applied to the terminal 200 and the network device 100 .
  • the transmission framework of the terminal 200 supports 1 TX channel corresponding to 2 antennas; the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can exchange information such as power capability, TX channel and antenna configuration, phase shifting gear, etc., and the terminal 200 transmits information to the network through a single antenna.
  • the device 100 polls and sends the AS-SRS, and the network device 100 performs uplink channel estimation based on the received AS-SRS, and determines the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal 200 based on the uplink channel estimation result and the above-mentioned interaction information, and feeds back to the terminal through CSI 200 indicates the above-mentioned destination delivery method.
  • the proposed method can make full use of the multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of the terminal 200 to improve uplink transmission performance, achieve higher BF gain, and at the same time, effectively avoid the problems existing in scheme 1 and scheme 2.
  • the foregoing beamforming method will be described in detail below.
  • FIG. 5A shows a transmission method of terminal 200 involved in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the transmission frame 1 includes a modem 20, RFIC 21 and RFFE 22. in:
  • the modem 20 includes a transmit channel selection (Transmit Channel Selection, TXS) and digital beamforming module 201, which is referred to as a TXS/DBF module for ease of description.
  • TXS/DBF module is a software module in the baseband Modem, which is used to realize the selection and signal transmission of a single TX channel, or realize the DBF transmission of multiple TX channels.
  • the TXS/DBF module may select a TX channel (such as TX0 or TX1 ) among the above two TX channels to send signals.
  • the TXS/DBF module may also select the above two TX channels to transmit signals together, and perform digital phase shift on the digital signal corresponding to the TX1 channel, so as to realize uplink DBF.
  • the RFFE 22 includes a power amplifier 221, a power amplifier 222, and an antenna selection (Antenna Selection, AS) and analog beamforming module 223.
  • this module is referred to as the AS/ABF module for short.
  • the power amplifier 221 is connected to the TX0 channel for power amplification of the output signal of the TX0 channel; the power amplifier 222 is connected to the TX1 channel for power amplification of the output signal of the TX1 channel; the AS/ABF module and the above two power amplifiers
  • the connection is used to realize the selection and signal transmission of a single antenna corresponding to each TX channel, or realize the multi-antenna ABF transmission corresponding to each TX channel.
  • the AS/ABF module may include a multi-way switch 0, a power divider 0, a phase shifter 0, a filter 0, and a filter 1 connected to the power amplifier 221, and may also include a multi-way switch 1 connected to the power amplifier 222, a power Splitter 1, Phase Shifter 1, Filter 2, and Filter 3. in:
  • the multi-way switch is used to control the above-mentioned TX channel to be connected to the above-mentioned n antennas at the same time, or to be connected to a single antenna among the above-mentioned n antennas; Divide the input signal into n signals with equal power, and output them to corresponding antennas through n output ports; the phase shifter is used to adjust the phase of the input signal according to the control signal; the above control signal can be the control signal sent by modem 20.
  • the multi-way switch 0 has three output ports, that is, an output port, a b output port, and a c output port.
  • a output port is connected to the first end of filter 0, and the second end of filter 0 is connected to antenna 0;
  • c output port is connected to the first end of filter 1, and the second end of filter 1 is connected to antenna 1;
  • b output port is connected to The first end of power divider 1, the second end of power divider 1 is connected to the first end of filter 0, the third end of power divider 1 is connected to the first end of phase shifter 0, the second end of phase shifter 0
  • the two terminals are connected to the first terminal of the filter 1 .
  • Power divider 0 is used to divide the input signal into two signals with equal power, and output to antenna 0 and antenna 1 through the second terminal and the third terminal respectively; phase shifter 0 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal, and output to Antenna 1.
  • the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 and antenna 1.
  • the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 0 corresponding to the TX0 channel can be realized;
  • the multi-way switch 0 is switched to the c output port, it can be Realize the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 1 corresponding to the TX0 channel;
  • the multi-way switch 0 is switched to the b output port, the concurrency of the two antennas corresponding to the TX0 channel and the phase shift of the analog signal corresponding to the antenna 1 can be realized, thereby realizing Uplink ABF of TX0 channel.
  • the multi-way switch 1 also has three output ports, namely an output port, an output port b, and an output port c.
  • a The output port is connected to the first end of the filter 2, and the second end of the filter 2 is connected to the antenna 2;
  • the output port is connected to the first end of the filter 3, and the second end of the filter 3 is connected to the antenna 3;
  • b The output port is connected to The first end of the power divider 1, the second end of the power divider 1 is connected to the first end of the filter 2, the third end of the power divider 1 is connected to the first end of the phase shifter 1, the second end of the phase shifter 1
  • the two terminals are connected to the first terminal of the filter 3 .
  • the power divider 1 is used to divide the input signal into two signals with equal power, and output to the antenna 2 and the antenna 3 through the second end and the third end respectively; the phase shifter 1 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal, and output to the Antenna3.
  • the TX1 channel corresponds to antenna 2 and antenna 3.
  • the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 2 corresponding to the TX1 channel can be realized;
  • the multi-way switch 1 is switched to the c output port, it can Realize the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 3 corresponding to the TX1 channel;
  • the multi-way switch 1 is switched to the b output port, the concurrency of the two antennas corresponding to the TX1 channel and the phase shift of the analog signal corresponding to the antenna 3 can be realized to realize the TX1 Uplink ABF of the channel.
  • FIG. 5B shows another transmission framework of terminal 200 involved in the embodiment of the present application Schematic diagram of the structure.
  • the sending frame includes modem 30, RFIC31 and RFFE32. in:
  • the RFFE 32 includes a power amplifier 321 and an AS/ABF module 322.
  • the AS/ABF module 322 includes a multiplexer 2 , a power divider 2 , a phase shifter 2 , a phase shifter 3 , a phase shifter 4 , a filter 4 , a filter 5 , a filter 6 and a filter 7 .
  • the multi-way switch 0 has five output ports, namely, an output port, b output port, c output port, d output port and e output port.
  • the b output port is connected to the first end of the filter 4, the second end of the filter 4 is connected to the antenna 0; the c output port is connected to the first end of the filter 5, and the second end of the filter 5 is connected to the antenna 1; the d output port is connected to The first end of the filter 6 and the second end of the filter 6 are connected to the antenna 2 ; the e output port is connected to the first end of the filter 7 , and the second end of the filter 7 is connected to the antenna 3 .
  • the a output port is connected to the first end of the power divider 2; the second end of the power divider 2 is connected to the first end of the filter 4; the third end of the power divider 2 is connected to the first end of the phase shifter 2, and the phase shift
  • the second end of the device 2 is connected to the first end of the filter 5; the fourth end of the power divider 2 is connected to the first end of the phase shifter 3, and the second end of the phase shifter 3 is connected to the first end of the filter 6;
  • the fifth terminal of the power divider 2 is connected to the first terminal of the phase shifter 4 , and the second terminal of the phase shifter 4 is connected to the first terminal of the filter 7 .
  • the power divider 2 is used to divide the input signal into four signals with equal power, and output to the antenna 0 to the antenna 3 respectively through the second terminal to the fifth terminal; the phase shifter 2 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal, and output to the Antenna 1; phase shifter 3 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal and output to antenna 2; phase shifter 4 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal and output to antenna 3.
  • the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 to antenna 4, and when the multi-way switch 2 is switched to the b output port (or c output port, d output port, e output port), the selection and signal of the single antenna corresponding to the TX0 channel can be realized. Sending; when the multi-way switch 2 is switched to the a output port, the concurrency of the four antennas corresponding to the TX0 channel and the phase shifting of the analog signals corresponding to the antenna 2 to the antenna 4 can be realized, thereby realizing the uplink ABF of the TX0 channel.
  • FIG. 5C shows another type of terminal 200 involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Schematic diagram of the sending framework For ease of description, it will be referred to as the sending frame 3 hereinafter.
  • the sending frame includes a modem 40, RFIC 41, and RFFE 42. in:
  • the RFFE 42 includes a power amplifier 421 and an AS/ABF module 422.
  • the AS/ABF module 422 includes the AS/ABF hardware structure corresponding to the TX0 channel in the AS/ABF module 223. For details, refer to the relevant description of the AS/ABF module 223, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal when multiple antennas are concurrent, the terminal does not adjust the phase of the analog signal of the first antenna (that is, the phase adjustment amount is 0), and uses the phase of the analog signal of the first antenna as a reference to adjust the phase of other antennas The phase of the analog signal, so as to realize the uplink ABF.
  • the terminal does not adjust the phase of the digital signal of the first TX channel (that is, the phase adjustment amount is 0), and uses the phase of the digital signal of the first TX channel as a reference to adjust the digital signals of other TX channels phase, so as to realize the uplink DBF.
  • the phase adjustment method is not limited to the above.
  • the terminal can adjust the phases of the analog signals of all antennas to implement uplink ABF.
  • the terminal may also adjust the phases of digital signals of all TX channels to implement uplink DBF, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the above three sending frameworks are exemplary sending frameworks provided by the embodiments of this application, and in practical applications, the above sending frameworks may also include more or less hardware.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of TX channels and the number of antennas corresponding to each TX channel.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number and structure of the RX channels and the number of antennas corresponding to each RX channel.
  • the uplink transmission signal of the terminal 200 may be weighted by ABF and/or DBF, and the comprehensive weight value of the final transmitted uplink beam relative to the initial baseband signal is referred to as HBF weight for short.
  • HBF weight the comprehensive weight value of the final transmitted uplink beam relative to the initial baseband signal.
  • the analog phase shift value is associated with the phase shift accuracy of the ABF
  • the digital phase shift value is associated with the phase shift accuracy of the DBF.
  • the embodiment of the present application can define M-type ABF phase-shifting gears, and the m-th type of phase-shifting gears in the above-mentioned M-type phase-shifting gears Contains K phase shifting gears. It is also possible to define N-type DBF phase-shifting gears, the nth type of phase-shifting gears in the above-mentioned N-type phase-shifting gears Contains L phase shifting gears. Wherein, M and L are positive integers. optional, The ABF phase shift accuracy is 360/K°. optional, The DBF phase shift accuracy is 360/L°.
  • Which type of ABF phase-shifting gear and/or which type of DBF phase-shifting gear the terminal 200 can support is affected by the hardware performance and software performance of the terminal 200 itself. It can be understood that the higher the precision of phase shifting, the higher the requirements for hardware performance and software performance, and the more information bits are required to represent the weight.
  • phase shift accuracy of both ABF and DBF is 90°
  • analog phase shift value of ABF and the digital phase shift value of DBF both have four phase shift positions of ⁇ 0°, 90°, 180°, -90° ⁇ bit.
  • phase shift accuracy of ABF and DBF is 45°
  • analog phase shift value and digital phase shift value are ⁇ 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, -135°, -90° ,-45° ⁇ These 8 phase shift positions.
  • the network device 100 can obtain the HBF weight codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 according to the ABF phase shifting gear and DBF phase shifting gear of the terminal 200, the TX channel configuration and the antenna configuration of the terminal 200 .
  • the terminal 200 is configured with Y antennas, the length of each codeword in the aforementioned HBF weight codebook set is Y, and the i-th symbol of each of the aforementioned codewords represents the The HBF weight of the i-th antenna.
  • the HBF weight of an antenna is 0, indicating that the antenna is not selected, and the HBF weight of an antenna is not 0, indicating that the antenna is selected.
  • the HBF weights of the antennas corresponding to a TX channel are all equal to 0, indicating that the TX channel is not selected; when the HBF weights of at least one antenna corresponding to a TX channel are not equal to 0, it indicates that the TX channel is selected.
  • HBF weight of the antenna corresponding to a TX channel When only one HBF weight of the antenna corresponding to a TX channel is not equal to 0, it indicates that the TX channel uses a single-antenna transmission mode and does not perform ABF; when the HBF weights of at least two antennas corresponding to a TX channel are not equal to 0, it indicates that The TX channel uses an ABF transmission manner, and the analog phase shift values of the at least two antennas can be determined based on the HBF weights of the at least two antennas.
  • TX channel When only one TX channel is selected, it indicates that the terminal uses a single-channel transmission method without DBF; when at least two TX channels are selected, it indicates that the TX channel uses the DBF transmission method, and the HBF weight of the antenna based on the above-mentioned at least two TX channels
  • the value can determine the digital phase shift value of the above-mentioned at least two TX channels.
  • the selected antenna means that data can be sent through the antenna
  • the selected TX channel means that data can be sent through the TX channel.
  • the TPMI codebook defined by the 3GPP protocol may be used as the HBF codebook set of the terminal 200 .
  • the TPMI codebook includes a 4-port uplink coherent codebook and a 2-port uplink coherent codebook, and the codebook set 1 corresponding to the 4-port uplink coherent codebook includes 27 codewords, as shown in Table 1;
  • the codebook set 2 corresponding to the uplink coherent codebook includes 6 codewords, as shown in Table 2 for details.
  • the codebook set 1 and the codebook set 2 are taken as examples below to illustrate the HBF weight codebook sets of terminals with three configurations.
  • the first configuration terminal with 2T/4 configuration
  • the uplink transmission mode of the terminal configured with 2T/4 includes: single antenna transmission; two TX channels for DBF transmission and two TX channels respectively select one antenna; two TX channels for DBF transmission and two The TX channel selects two antennas for ABF transmission.
  • the codebook set 1 is used as the HBF weight codebook set, and the HBF weight codebook set is applicable to a terminal in a 2T/4 configuration with both ABF and DBF phase shift precisions being 90°.
  • Table 1 it can be seen that the codewords in codebook set 1 do not support the transmission of three antennas, that is, the following transmission methods are not supported: one of the two TX channels performs single-antenna transmission, and the other uses two TX channels for two-antenna transmission. ABF sent.
  • the transmission frame of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 can refer to the foregoing transmission frame 1, that is, the terminal 200 is configured with a TX0 channel and a TX1 channel, the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 and antenna 1, and the TX1 channel corresponds to antenna 2 and antenna 3,
  • the four symbols of a codeword in codebook set 1 are the HBF weights of antenna 0 to antenna 3 respectively. It can be understood that the TX0 channel corresponds to the first two symbols in the codeword, and the TX1 channel corresponds to the last two symbols in the codeword.
  • the codeword W 10 whose index is 10 in the codebook set 1 as an example, the relationship between each symbol in the codeword and the antenna and TX channel is shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the indices of the 28 codewords in codebook set 1 are 0 to 27 respectively, where:
  • the first and third symbols of the four codewords with indexes 4 to 7 are not equal to 0, and the second and fourth symbols are both equal to zero, which indicates that 2 TX channels can perform DBF send.
  • the first symbol indicates that the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX0 channel is 0, and the phase difference between the third symbol and the first symbol indicates the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX1 channel. It can be seen from Table 1 that the digital phase shift values corresponding to the TX1 channel indicated by these four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
  • the second and fourth symbols of the four codewords with indexes 8 to 11 are not equal to 0, and the first and third symbols are both equal to zero, which indicates that 2 TX channels can perform DBF send.
  • the above-mentioned second symbol indicates that the digital phase-shift value corresponding to the TX0 channel is 0, and the phase difference between the above-mentioned fourth symbol and the second symbol indicates the corresponding digital phase-shift value of the TX1 channel; by table 1, it can be seen that the digital phase shift values corresponding to the TX1 channel indicated by these four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
  • the four symbols of the 16 codewords with indexes 12 to 27 are not equal to 0, which indicates that 2 TX channels are used for DBF transmission, TX0 channel can perform ABF transmission through antenna 0 and antenna 1, and TX1 channel can be transmitted through antenna 2 and antenna 3 Perform ABF transmission.
  • the first symbol above indicates that the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX0 channel is 0, and the phase difference between the third symbol and the first symbol indicates the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX1 channel; antenna 0 and The analog phase shift values corresponding to antenna 2 are all 0, the phase difference between the second symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1, and the phase difference between the fourth symbol and the third symbol The difference indicates the corresponding analog phase shift value for antenna 3.
  • the second configuration terminal with 1T/4 configuration
  • the uplink transmission mode of the terminal configured with 1T/4 includes: single antenna transmission; two antennas for ABF transmission; three antennas for ABF Sending; four antennas for ABF sending.
  • the codebook set 1 is used as the HBF weight codebook set, and the HBF weight codebook set is applicable to a 1T/4 configured terminal whose ABF phase shift accuracy is 90°.
  • the transmission frame of the terminal configured in 1T/4 can refer to the foregoing transmission frame 2, that is, the terminal is configured with a TX0 channel, and the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 to antenna 3.
  • the four symbols of a codeword in codebook set 1 are the HBF weights of antenna 0 to antenna 3 respectively.
  • Table 1 it can be known that codewords in codebook set 1 do not support ABF transmission with 3 antennas.
  • the transmission frame 2 it can be seen that the transmission frame 2 does not support the selection of 2 and 3 antennas, that is, the terminal with the transmission frame 2 does not support two antennas for ABF transmission and three antennas for ABF transmission.
  • the terminal configured with 1T/4 can also support ABF transmission of 2 antennas and ABF transmission of 3 antennas. ABF sent.
  • the indices of the 28 codewords in codebook set 1 are 0 to 27, respectively, for the above-mentioned 1T/4 configured terminal, where:
  • the first symbol and the third symbol of the four codewords with indexes 4 to 7 are not equal to 0, and the second symbol and the fourth symbol are both equal to zero, which indicates that the TX0 channel can pass antenna 0 and Antenna 2 performs ABF transmission.
  • the above-mentioned first symbol indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 0 is 0, and the phase difference between the above-mentioned third symbol and the first symbol indicates the corresponding analog phase shift value of antenna 2; 1, it can be seen that the above four codewords indicate that the analog phase shift values corresponding to antenna 2 are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
  • the second and fourth symbols of the codewords with indexes 8 to 11 are not equal to 0, and the first and third symbols are both equal to zero, which indicates that the TX0 channel can pass through antenna 1 and antenna 3 Perform ABF transmission.
  • the above-mentioned second symbol indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1 is 0, and the phase difference between the above-mentioned fourth symbol and the second symbol indicates the corresponding analog phase shift value of antenna 3; 1, it can be seen that the analog phase shift values corresponding to the antenna 3 indicated by the above four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
  • the first symbol indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1 is 0, the phase difference between the second symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1, and the third code The phase difference between the first symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 2, and the phase difference between the fourth symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 3.
  • the third configuration terminal with 1T/2 configuration
  • the uplink transmission mode of the terminal configured in 1T/2 includes: single-antenna transmission; two antennas perform ABF transmission.
  • the codebook set 2 is used as the HBF weight codebook set, and the HBF weight codebook set is applicable to a 1T/2 configured terminal with an ABF phase shift accuracy of 90°.
  • the transmission frame of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/2 can refer to the aforementioned transmission frame 3, that is, the terminal 200 is configured with a TX0 channel, and the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 and antenna 1, and two codewords in a codebook set 2
  • the symbols are the HBF weights of antenna 0 and antenna 1 respectively.
  • the codebook set 2 includes 6 codewords in total, and the indexes of the 6 codewords are 0 to 5 respectively, where:
  • the codeword with index 0 Only the first symbol in the codeword with index 0 is not equal to 0, which indicates the single-antenna transmission mode of antenna 0. Similarly, the codeword with index 1 indicates the single-antenna transmission mode of antenna 1.
  • Neither of the two symbols of the four codewords with indexes 2 to 5 is equal to zero, which indicates that the TX0 channel can perform ABF transmission through antenna 0 and antenna 1 .
  • the first symbol of the two symbols indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 0 is 0°
  • the phase difference between the second symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1 value. It can be seen from Table 2 that the analog phase shift value division ratios corresponding to antenna 1 indicated by the above four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90°.
  • codebook set 1 and codebook set 2 are power corrected. Specifically, it will be introduced in detail in subsequent embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network device 100 can determine the codeword corresponding to the optimal uplink transmission mode from the HBF weight codebook set applicable to the terminal 200; the terminal 200 is based on The codeword can determine whether to perform DBF, the digital phase shift value when performing DBF, whether to perform ABF, and the analog phase shift value when performing ABF during subsequent uplink transmission.
  • FIG. 7A exemplarily shows a flowchart of a beamforming method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the beamforming method is applied to the terminal 200 and the network device 100.
  • the beamforming method includes but is not limited to steps S101 to S113, wherein:
  • the terminal 200 sends a first message to the network device 100.
  • the network device 100 receives the first message sent by the terminal 200.
  • the first message is used to report the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
  • the network device 100 parses the first message, and identifies the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
  • the first message is a high-level signaling message, such as a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) layer message.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • different terminals and different frequency bands may support different configurations of TX channels and antennas.
  • the terminal 200 in order to adapt to different terminals and frequency bands, the terminal 200 needs to report the TX channel and antenna configuration to the network device 100, so that the network device 100 can adaptively determine the target transmission mode under the configuration for different configurations.
  • the first message carries the configuration type of the terminal 200, and the configuration type of the terminal 200 is used to indicate the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
  • the configuration types of the TX channels and antennas of the terminal 200 may include the following three types:
  • Configuration type 0 The terminal is configured with 2 TX channels and 4 antennas (that is, 2T/4 configuration).
  • Configuration type 1 The terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 4 antennas (that is, 1T/4 configuration).
  • Configuration type 2 The terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 2 antennas (that is, 1T/2 configuration).
  • the frequency bands supported by terminals with configuration type 0 are usually NR TDD frequency bands
  • the frequency bands supported by terminals with configuration type 1 are usually NR TDD frequency bands or FDD medium and high frequency bands (such as 1-3 GHz)
  • the frequency bands supported by terminals with configuration type 2 are usually For FDD low frequency band (eg frequency band ⁇ 1GHz).
  • the terminal involved in the embodiment of the present application may have more possible configuration types under other TX channel and antenna configurations, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the terminal 200 characterizes the configuration type through the index (for example, 0, 1, 2) corresponding to each configuration type, and passes the first message
  • the index corresponding to the configuration type of the terminal 200 is carried in the preset field 1 of .
  • the network device 100 obtains the index corresponding to the configuration type by parsing the first message, and then can identify the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 .
  • the terminal 200 is configured with multiple TX channels and multiple antennas, but only some of the TX channels and antennas support HBF.
  • the terminal 200 reports the TX channel and antenna supporting HBF, and the first message carries the index of the TX channel supporting HBF and the index of the antenna; or, the TX channel and antenna supporting HBF correspond to the specified configuration type, and the first message carries the index of the above configuration type index.
  • the terminal 200 sends a second message to the network device 100, and the network device 100 receives the second message sent by the terminal 200, and the second message is used to report the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200.
  • the network device 100 parses the second message, and identifies the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200.
  • the second message is a high-level signaling message, such as an RRC layer message.
  • the maximum transmission power allowed by the protocol may be different.
  • the terminal 200 in order to adapt to different frequency bands, the terminal 200 needs to report the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel to the network device 100, so as to adapt to different power amplifier designs and the network device 100 to adapt to different power capabilities accurately determine the target transmission mode under the power capability.
  • the second message carries the power capability type of the terminal 200, and the power capability type of the terminal 200 is used to indicate the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200.
  • a terminal configured with two TX channels is taken as an example for illustration.
  • the terminal 200 is configured with two TX channels, and the terminal 200 needs to report the power capability of the two TX channels to the network device 100 .
  • the maximum transmission power allowed by the protocol is P_max, and the power capability types of the terminal 200 include the following three types:
  • Power capability 0 that is, the maximum transmit power supported by each of the two TX channels is P_max.
  • the maximum transmit power supported by each of the two TX channels is (P_max/2).
  • the terminal is configured with A TX channels
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the above-mentioned A TX channels, and the terminal 200 uses the index corresponding to each power capability type (for example, 0, 1, 2) Characterize the above various power capability types, and carry an index corresponding to the power capability type of the terminal 200 in the preset field 2 of the second message.
  • the network device 100 obtains the index of the power capability type of the terminal 200 by parsing the second message, and then can identify the maximum transmission power supported by the two TX channels of the terminal 200 .
  • steps S103 and S104 are optional.
  • the terminal 200 is configured with only one TX channel, and the sending frame of the terminal 200 may refer to the aforementioned sending frame 2 or sending frame 3 .
  • the terminal 200 does not need to report the power capability, and the network device 100 may assume that the maximum transmission power supported by the TX channel of the terminal 200 is the above-mentioned P_max.
  • the network device 100 locally stores the power capability of each TX channel of the terminal 200, or the network device 100 may indirectly acquire the power capability of each TX channel of the terminal 200 through other third-party devices. In this case, the terminal 200 does not need to report the power capability.
  • the terminal 200 is configured with n TX channels, and the maximum transmit powers supported by the n TX channels are all the above-mentioned P_max. In this case, the terminal 200 does not need to report the power capability information. If the network device 100 does not receive the power capability reported by the terminal 200, the default maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200 is the above P_max.
  • the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can realize power capability interaction, that is, the terminal 200 has the function of reporting the power capability, and the network device 100 has the function of identifying the power capability.
  • the more the number of TX channels configured on the terminal 200 the more optional power capability types, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the terminal 200 sends a third message to the network device 100, and the network device 100 receives the third message sent by the terminal 200.
  • the third message is used to indicate the phase-shifting gears supported by the terminal 200, and the phase-shifting gears include ABF phase-shifting gears and/or DBF phase shift gears.
  • the network device 100 parses the third message, and identifies the ABF phase-shifting gear and/or the DBF phase-shifting gear supported by the terminal 200.
  • the second message is a high-level signaling message, such as an RRC layer message.
  • terminals with different hardware performance and software performance may support different ABF phase shifting gears and/or DBF phase shifting gears.
  • the terminal 200 in order to adapt to different hardware performance and software performance, the terminal 200 needs to report the ABF phase-shifting gear and/or DBF phase-shifting gear to the network device 100, so that the network device 100 can target different phase-shifting gears
  • the bit adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the phase shift gear.
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase shifting precisions of the phase shifting gears, and the terminal 200 can carry the ABF phase shifting precision and/or the DBF phase shifting precision through the preset field 3 of the third message,
  • the ABF phase shift accuracy is used to indicate the ABF phase shift gear
  • the DBF phase shift accuracy is used to indicate the DBF phase shift gear.
  • the ABF (or DBF) phase shifting gears when the ABF (or DBF) phase shifting accuracy is 90°, the ABF (or DBF) phase shifting gears include ⁇ 0°, 90°, 180°,- 90° ⁇ ; when the ABF (or DBF) phase shift accuracy is 45°, the ABF (or DBF) phase shift gears include ⁇ 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, -135°, -90° ,-45° ⁇ .
  • the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase shifting gear types, and the third message carries an index of the phase shifting gear type of the terminal.
  • this application defines M types of ABF phase shifting gears and N types of DBF phase shifting gears, and each type of phase shifting gear has a corresponding index.
  • M and N are positive integers greater than 1.
  • the terminal 200 may carry the index of the ABF phase-shifting gear and/or the index of the DBF phase-shifting gear through the preset field 3 of the third message.
  • the index of the ABF phase-shifting gear indicates which type of phase-shifting gear the terminal 200 supports in the above-mentioned M-type ABF phase-shifting gears;
  • the index of the DBF phase-shifting gear indicates that the terminal 200 supports the above-mentioned N-type DBF Which type of phase shift gear in the phase shift gear.
  • the above-mentioned M-type ABF phase-shift gears and N-type DBF phase-shift gears can include ⁇ 0°, 90°, 180°, -90° ⁇ and ⁇ 0°, 45°, 90°, 135° ,180°,-135°,-90°,-45° ⁇ .
  • the amount of information required to report which type of ABF phase-shifting gear and DBF phase-shifting gear it supports is in, Indicates that x is rounded up.
  • the amount of information required to report which type of ABF phase shift gear is supported is
  • steps S105 and S106 are optional.
  • the network device 100 locally stores the phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200, or the network device 100 may obtain the phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200 indirectly through other third-party devices. In this case, the terminal 200 does not need to report the phase shift gear.
  • the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can realize the interaction of the phase shifting gear, that is, the terminal 200 has the function of reporting the phase shifting gear, and the network device 100 has the function of identifying the phase shifting gear.
  • step S101, step S103, and step S105 may be implemented in a preset order, or may be implemented simultaneously.
  • step S101, step S103 and step S105 are implemented simultaneously, the first message, the second message and the third message may be the same message, and the preset field 1, the preset field 2 and the preset field 3 are the first message different fields in .
  • the network device 100 determines configuration information of AS-SRS resources of the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
  • a terminal capable of realizing ABF a terminal capable of realizing ABF and DBF are collectively referred to as a terminal supporting HBF.
  • the terminal 200 also indicates whether the terminal 200 supports HBF through the preset field 4 of the first message.
  • the network device 100 can determine whether the terminal 200 supports HBF by parsing the first message. After the network device 100 determines that the terminal 200 supports HBF based on the first message, determine the configuration information of the AS-SRS resource of the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200, and execute S108; otherwise, proceed according to the existing uplink transmission technology send uplink. It can be understood that in this embodiment, the network device 100 only configures corresponding AS-SRS resources for terminals supporting HBF.
  • the network device 100 sends configuration information of the AS-SRS resource to the terminal 200.
  • the AS-SRS resource configuration information may include SRS frequency hopping bandwidth (srs-HoppingBandwidth, bhop) configuration, UE-level SRS (BSRS) bandwidth (srs-Bandwidth), and cell-level SRS (CSRS) bandwidth configuration (srs-BandwidthConfig), the number of SRS symbols transmitted in a subframe (such as the number of symbols transmitted under the Rel-16LTE standard (nrofSymbols-r16)), the number of symbols of the SRS guard period (guard period, GP), and the bits of the SRS Bitmap (bitmap), SRS frequency domain position (freqDomainPosition), etc.
  • the SRS bitmap (bitmap) is used to indicate that the symbols sent in one subframe are SRS symbols or GP symbols.
  • the 3GPP protocol defines AS-SRS, but usually the network device 100 (such as a base station) only configures AS-SRS resources for terminals in TDD frequency band cells, and does not configure AS-SRS resources for terminals in FDD cells. This is because the current technology cannot make full use of the channel information corresponding to all the antennas of the terminal in the FDD frequency band.
  • the network device 100 can configure AS-SRS for the terminal supporting HBF in the FDD frequency band cell, acquire and use the uplink CSI corresponding to all antennas of the terminal, so as to improve the FDD uplink performance.
  • the terminal 200 After the terminal 200 determines the AS-SRS resource of the terminal 200 based on the configuration information of the AS-SRS resource, it sends the AS-SRS on the AS-SRS resource through single-antenna polling, and the network device 100 receives the terminal 200 through single-antenna polling. Sent AS-SRS.
  • the terminal is configured with Y antennas, and the terminal 200 uses the above-mentioned Y antennas to poll and send AS-SRS on the above-mentioned AS-SRS resource, and the network device 100 receives the terminal 200 on the above-mentioned AS-SRS resource through the above-mentioned Y
  • the root antenna single-antenna polls the sent AS-SRS.
  • the multi-way switch 0 is switched to the b output port, the c output port, the d output port, and the e output port respectively, respectively.
  • the AS-SRS is sent in a single-antenna polling manner through antenna 0 to antenna 3 .
  • the multiplexer 0 is switched to the a output port and the c output port respectively, and the antenna 0 and the antenna 1 single-antenna Polling to send AS-SRS.
  • the network device 100 estimates an uplink channel matrix corresponding to the first antenna based on the AS-SRS sent by the first antenna among the Y antennas of the terminal 200, where the first antenna is any one of the above Y antennas.
  • the network device 100 includes D receiving antennas, and the network device 100 estimates the D*1-dimensional uplink channel matrix corresponding to the first antenna based on the AS-SRS sent by the first antenna; the network device 100 estimates the terminal 200
  • the uplink channel matrices of the Y antennas form the D*Y-dimensional uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above Y antennas in order of the antennas.
  • the network device 100 determines the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200, and the HBF configuration information is used for Indicates the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal 200.
  • the network device 100 sends the first CSI to the terminal 200, where the first CSI carries HBF configuration information.
  • the network device 100 can determine the uplink channel in various uplink transmission modes based on the uplink channel estimation of each antenna of the terminal 200, TX channel and antenna configuration, phase shift gear, and the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel.
  • the effective channel gain is determined, and the transmission mode with the largest equivalent channel gain is determined as the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal 200, and the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode is obtained, that is, the parameters of the target transmission mode are indicated through the HBF configuration information.
  • the parameters of the target transmission method indicated by the HBF configuration information include: which TX channels are selected, when at least two TX channels are selected, the DBF digital phase shift value between the TX channels, which antennas are selected for each TX channel; one TX channel When at least two antennas are selected, the ABF analog phase shift values of the above at least two antennas.
  • the TX channel selection and the DBF digital phase shift value between TX channels are used to control the TXS/DBF module of modem 20, the antenna selection in each TX channel and the ABF analog phase shift between antennas The value is used to control the AS/ABF module.
  • the HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the B TX channels for uplink transmission among the A TX channels , the digital phase shift value of the digital beamforming DBF of the B TX channels, the D antennas for uplink transmission among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel among the B TX channels, and/or the D antennas
  • An analog phase shift value of analog beamforming ABF, the first TX channel is any one of the B TX channels.
  • step S111 may specifically include Z1 to Z4. in:
  • the network device 100 determines the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 and the phase shift gear. Z2. The network device 100 performs power correction on the first codebook set based on the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel, and obtains a second codebook set after correction. Z3. Obtain an equivalent channel gain corresponding to each codeword in the second codebook set based on the estimated uplink channel matrix of the terminal 200 . Z4. Determine the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 based on the first codeword with the largest equivalent channel gain in the second codebook set.
  • the equivalent channel gain corresponding to each codeword in step Z4 is the modulus square of the product vector of the codeword and the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas of the terminal 200 .
  • the power correction is performed on the codewords in the codebook set so that the sum of the signal transmission power of each TX channel of the terminal 200 using the codeword meets the maximum transmission power of the terminal 200 in the current frequency band , and each TX channel satisfies the maximum transmit power supported by the channel, thereby improving the uplink transmit gain as much as possible.
  • the first codebook set may use codebook set 1 or codebook set 2 corresponding to the TPMI codebook.
  • codebook set 1 or codebook set 2 corresponding to the TPMI codebook.
  • the first configuration terminal with 2T/4 configuration
  • step Z1 when the terminal 200 is a terminal configured with 2T/4, and the phase shift accuracy of ABF and DBF are both 90°, the network device 100 determines that the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 is the codebook set 1.
  • step Z2 the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 1 according to the power capability reported by the terminal 200 to obtain a second codebook set.
  • the power capability reported by the terminal 200 may include the aforementioned power capability 0, power capability 1, and power capability 2.
  • a terminal configured with 2T/4 may refer to the aforementioned transmission frame 1. Specifically,
  • the network device 100 When the terminal 200 reports a power capability of 0, that is, the maximum transmission power supported by the TX0 channel and the TX1 channel is both P_max, the network device 100 performs the power correction on the codebook set 1 as follows:
  • W k is the kth codeword in the codebook set 1, ⁇ 0; k is the correction parameter of the power capability 0 of the kth codeword in the codebook set 1, W 0, k is the power passing through the power capability 0 The kth codeword of the modified second codebook set.
  • each symbol of the codeword W 10 whose index is 26 in the codebook set 1 and the TX channel is shown in FIG. Both are (P_max/4), and the maximum transmission power of the TX0 channel and TX1 channel corresponding to the revised W 0,10 are both (P_max/2), which meets the maximum transmission supported by the TX0 channel and TX1 channel indicated by the power capability 0 power, and the sum of the power corresponding to the two TX channels satisfies the maximum transmit power P_max supported by the terminal 200.
  • the network device 100 performs the power correction on the codebook set 1 as follows:
  • ⁇ 1;k is the correction parameter of the power capability 1 of the k-th codeword of the codebook set 1
  • W 1,k is the k-th codeword of the second codebook set after the power correction of the power capability 1 .
  • the network device 100 When the terminal 200 reports the power capability 2, that is, the maximum transmission power supported by the TX0 channel and the TX1 channel are both (P_max/2), the network device 100 performs the following power correction on the codebook set 1:
  • ⁇ 2;k is the correction parameter of the power capability 1 of the k-th codeword of the codebook set 1
  • W 2,k is the k-th codeword of the second codebook set after the power correction of the power capability 1 .
  • the second configuration terminal with 1T/4 configuration
  • step Z1 when the terminal 200 is configured with 1T/4 and the ABF phase shift accuracy is 90°, the network device 100 determines that the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 is the codebook set 1. In step Z2, the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 1 according to the power capability of the TX channel of the terminal 200 to obtain the second codebook set.
  • a terminal with one TX channel is configured, and the maximum transmission power supported by the TX channel may be P_max.
  • the power correction method of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/4 may refer to the method of modifying the power capability 0 of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4, which will not be repeated here.
  • the third configuration terminal with 1T/2 configuration
  • step Z1 when the terminal 200 is configured in 1T/2 and the ABF phase shift accuracy is 90°, the network device 100 determines that the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 is the codebook set 2. In step Z2, the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 2 according to the power capability of the TX channel of the terminal 200 to obtain the second codebook set.
  • a terminal with one TX channel is configured, and the maximum transmission power supported by the TX channel may be P_max.
  • the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 2 as follows:
  • ⁇ k is the correction parameter of the kth codeword of codebook set 2
  • W′ k is the kth codeword of the second codebook set after power correction.
  • the network device 100 uses the PMI field in the first CSI to carry the HBF configuration information.
  • the presentation manners of the content of the HBF configuration information include but not limited to manner 1 and manner 2.
  • the HBF configuration information is the index of the first codeword in the codebook set.
  • the HBF configuration information is a parameter of the target sending mode.
  • the terminal 200 with the 2T/4 configuration of the transmission frame 2 there are two options for the single-antenna transmission of the TX0 channel (or TX1), and there are K options for the ABF phase-shifting gear for ABF transmission by two antennas, a total of (K+ 2) Choices. There are 2 options for selecting one of the 2 TX channels for single-channel transmission, and there are L options for the DBF phase-shift gear for DBF transmission of the 2 TX channels, a total of (L+2) options.
  • the information feedback amount of the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 is
  • the information feedback amount of the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/4 is
  • the information feedback amount of the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/4 is
  • the total transmit power corresponding to each codeword in the second codebook set is less than or equal to the maximum transmit power supported by the terminal, and the C antennas corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel in each codeword in the second codebook set
  • the sum of the transmission powers of symbols is less than or equal to the maximum transmission power supported by the first TX channel, and each codeword in the second codebook set is used to indicate an uplink transmission mode of the terminal.
  • the phase difference between the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel is the ABF phase shift gear supported by the terminal.
  • the A TX channels also include the second TX channel
  • the first The phase difference between the two symbols corresponding to the first antenna of the TX channel and the second YX channel is the phase shifting gear of the DBF supported by the terminal.
  • the terminal 200 configures parameters for uplink transmission based on the HBF configuration information.
  • full-band level uplink channel estimation and CSI feedback can be performed, and subband level uplink channel estimation and CSI feedback can also be performed for each subband, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment.
  • the terminal Based on the HBF configuration information fed back by the first CSI, the terminal analyzes parameters such as TX channel selection, DBF digital phase shift value between TX channels, antenna selection in each TX channel, and ABF analog phase shift value between antennas.
  • the terminal 200 configures the sending frame 1 as an example for illustration.
  • the terminal 200 performs DBF transmission based on the DBF analog phase shift value between the TX channels;
  • the terminal 200 switches the multi-channel switch 0 of the TX channel to the output port a when transmitting uplink, and performs single-antenna transmission through the antenna 0 of the TX channel;
  • the terminal 200 switches the multi-channel switch 0 of the TX channel to the output port b when the terminal 200 transmits uplink, and the TX channel performs ABF transmission based on the ABF analog phase shift values of the two antennas.
  • one transmission channel in the AS/ABF module provided by the embodiment of the present application can correspond to two antennas, which provides hardware support for the terminal to realize uplink ABF.
  • the network device 100 determines and feeds back the HBF configuration information according to the uplink channel estimation, and does not depend on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels.
  • the beamforming method is applicable to the FDD frequency band and the TDD frequency band.
  • the network device 100 can obtain the equivalent channel gain of different transmission modes through the uplink channel estimation of each antenna according to the actual environment of the channel, and adaptively select the optimal uplink transmission mode for the terminal 200, In this way, various channel environments can be adaptively dealt with.
  • the network device 100 may use the HBF configuration information to instruct the terminal 200 to perform HBF transmission through the four antennas; When the channel strength corresponding to the 4 antennas is unbalanced and the channel correlation is low, the network device 100 may instruct the terminal 200 to perform uplink transmission through 3, 2 or 1 antennas based on the actual uplink channel estimation result.
  • the network device 100 may instruct the terminal 200 to perform uplink ABF transmission through the HBF configuration information.
  • the network device 100 may instruct the terminal 200 to use a single antenna with better channel quality for uplink transmission.
  • the maximum BF gain can reach 6dB.
  • the maximum BF gain can reach 6dB.
  • the uplink coherent code is used.
  • the maximum BF gain can reach 3dB for the uplink transmission of this system; for the terminal 200 configured in 1T/2, compared with the uplink transmission of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/1, the maximum BF gain can reach 3dB.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the connection relationship between the antenna and the RX channel.
  • One RX channel may correspond to one antenna.
  • the terminal When the terminal has four receiving channels, the terminal only needs four antennas.
  • the terminal 200 does not need to add additional antennas, which saves costs.
  • the AS/ABF module does not need to perform combination processing on downlink signals, and the uplink BF sending method provided has no impact on downlink communication.
  • the BF gain of the beamforming method provided in this embodiment is exemplarily described below with reference to FIG. 7B and FIG. 7C .
  • 7B and 7C are schematic diagrams of the uplink BF gain of the 2T/4 configured terminal 200 in the LOS scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the abscissa of the curves shown in FIG. 7B and FIG. 7C is the incoming wave angle, and the ordinate is Uplink BF gain.
  • the terminal 200 can obtain the target codeword fed back by the network device 100, and perform uplink transmission based on the codeword to obtain an uplink BF gain.
  • both the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 only have four phase-shifting gears of ⁇ 0°, 90°, 180°, -90° ⁇ . It can be seen from Fig. 7B that when the direction of arrival is 0°, 60°, 90° and 120°, the target codeword completely matches the angle of arrival, and the above-mentioned beamforming method can achieve a BF gain of 6dB.
  • the uplink BF gain is slightly lower, the lowest being about 5.2dB.
  • the ABF phase-shifting gears and DBF phase-shifting gears of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 are only ⁇ 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, -135°, -90°, - 45° ⁇ These 8 phase shift positions.
  • the target codeword matches the angle of arrival completely, and the above beamforming method can A BF gain of 6dB is achieved, and the minimum BF gain in other incoming wave directions is about 5.8dB gain.
  • the higher the phase shifting accuracy is, the greater the probability of achieving a BF gain of 6dB, and the greater the minimum gain that can be achieved.
  • the functional modules of the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can be divided according to the above-mentioned beamforming method. integrated in one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • the wireless access protocol system includes an RRC layer, a media access control layer (Media Access Control, MAC) and a physical layer (Physical Layer, PHY), and the functions of each functional module of the terminal 200 and the network device 100 are determined by corresponding implementation of the protocol layer.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • PHY Physical Layer
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal 200 involved in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the RRC layer of the terminal 200 includes a TX channel and antenna configuration reporting module, a power capability reporting module, and a phase shift gear reporting module
  • the PHY layer uplink includes an AS-SRS sending module, a TXS/DBF module and an AS/DBF module
  • the physical layer downlink includes a CSI parsing module.
  • the TX channel and antenna configuration reporting module is used to report the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 .
  • the TX channel and antenna configuration reporting module reports the index of the configuration type of the terminal 200 .
  • the power capability reporting module is used to report the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200 .
  • the power capability reporting module reports the index of the power capability type of the terminal 200 .
  • the phase shift gear reporting module is used to report the ABF phase shift gear and/or DBF phase shift gear of the terminal 200 .
  • the phase shift gear reporting module reports the ABF phase shift accuracy and/or DBF phase shift accuracy of the terminal 200 .
  • the phase-shift gear reporting module reports the index of the ABF phase-shift gear and/or the index of the DBF phase-shift gear of the terminal 200 .
  • the AS-SRS sending module is used for polling the AS-SRS sent by the single-antenna polling on the AS-SRS resources configured by the network device 100 .
  • the CSI analysis module is used to analyze the CSI sent by the network device 100, and obtain the HBF configuration information sent uplink.
  • the HBF configuration information is used to indicate which TX channels are selected. When at least two TX channels are selected, the DBF digital phase shift value between the TX channels, Which antennas are selected for each TX channel; when at least two antennas are selected for one TX channel, the ABF analog phase shift values of the above at least two antennas.
  • the TXS/DBF module is used to determine the TX channel for uplink transmission and the DBF digital phase shift value of the TX channel according to the TX channel selection indicated by the HBF configuration information.
  • the AS/DBF module is used to determine the antenna for uplink transmission and the ABF analog phase shift value of the antenna according to the antenna selection indicated by the HBF configuration information.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device 100 involved in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the RRC layer of the network device 100 includes a TX channel and antenna configuration identification module, a power capability identification module, and a phase shift gear identification module
  • the MAC layer includes an AS-SRS resource configuration module
  • the PHY layer uplink includes uplink channel estimation module, a CSI information determination module, and a physical layer downlink including a CSI feedback module.
  • the TX channel and antenna configuration identification module is used to identify the TX channel and antenna configuration reported by the terminal 200, and determine the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
  • the TX channel and antenna configuration identification module determines the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 based on the configuration type index reported by the terminal 200 .
  • the power capability identification module is used to identify the power capability reported by the terminal 200, and determine the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200.
  • the power capability identification module determines the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200 based on the index of the HBF power type reported by the terminal 200 .
  • the phase-shift gear identification module is used to identify the ABF phase-shift gear and/or the DBF phase-shift gear reported by the terminal 200 .
  • the phase-shift gear identification module determines the ABF phase-shift gear of the terminal 200 based on the ABF phase-shift accuracy reported by the terminal 200; and determines the DBF phase-shift gear of the terminal 200 based on the DBF phase-shift accuracy reported by the terminal 200.
  • the phase-shifting gear identification module determines the ABF phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200 based on the index of the ABF phase-shifting gear reported by the terminal 200; based on the index of the DBF phase-shifting gear reported by the terminal 200, determines the DBF phase shift gear.
  • the AS-SRS resource configuration module is configured to configure AS-SRS resources for the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 .
  • the uplink channel estimation module is configured to estimate the uplink channel matrix corresponding to each antenna of the terminal 200 based on the AS-SRS sent by the terminal 200 through single-antenna polling.
  • the CSI information determination module is used to determine the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to each antenna, TX channel and antenna configuration, phase shift gear and the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel.
  • the CSI feedback module is used to feed back the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 .
  • FIG. 10 exemplarily shows the structure of a terminal 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal 200 may include: one or more terminal device processors 101 , memory 102 , communication interface 103 , receiver 105 , transmitter 106 , coupler 107 , antenna 108 , and terminal device interface 109 . These components may be connected via the bus 104 or in other ways, and FIG. 10 takes the connection via the bus as an example. in:
  • the communication interface 103 can be used for the terminal 200 to communicate with other communication devices, such as network devices.
  • the network device may be the network device 100 shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the communication interface 103 may be a 5G communication interface, or may be a communication interface of a future new air interface.
  • the terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 103, such as a local access network (local access network, LAN) interface.
  • the transmitter 106 can be used to transmit and process the signal output by the terminal device processor 101 .
  • the receiver 105 can be used for receiving and processing the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 108 .
  • the transmitter 106 and the receiver 105 can be regarded as a wireless modem.
  • the number of the transmitter 106 and the number of the receiver 105 can be one or more.
  • Antenna 108 may be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line to electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space to electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • the coupler 107 is used to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 108 into multiple paths and distribute them to multiple receivers 105 .
  • the terminal 200 may also include other communication components, such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth (bluetooth) module, a wireless high-fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
  • the terminal 200 may further include an input and output module.
  • the input and output module can be used to realize the interaction between the terminal 200 and other terminal devices/external environments, and can mainly include an audio input and output module, a key input module, and a display.
  • the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like. Wherein, both the input and output modules communicate with the terminal device processor 101 through the terminal device interface 109 .
  • the memory 102 is coupled with the terminal device processor 101 and is used for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • the memory 102 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the memory 102 may store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as the system), such as embedded operating systems such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX.
  • the memory 102 can also store a network communication program, which can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, and one or more network devices.
  • the memory 102 may be used to store an implementation program on the terminal 200 side of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application.
  • the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application please refer to the foregoing embodiments.
  • the terminal device processor 101 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal device processor 101 can be used to call a program stored in the memory 102, such as the implementation program of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
  • the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 10 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the terminal 200 may include more or fewer components, which is not limited here.
  • the structure of a network device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
  • FIG. 11 exemplarily shows the structure of a network device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 100 may include: one or more network device processors 201 , memory 202 , communication interface 203 , receiver 205 , transmitter 206 , coupler 207 , antenna 208 , and network device interface 209 . These components may be connected through the bus 204 or in other ways, and FIG. 11 takes the connection through the bus as an example. in:
  • the communication interface 203 can be used for the network device 100 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices.
  • the terminal device may be the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the communication interface 203 may be a 5G communication interface, or may be a communication interface of a future new air interface.
  • the network device 100 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 203, such as a local access network (local access network, LAN) interface.
  • the transmitter 206 can be used for transmitting and processing the signal output by the network device processor 201 .
  • the receiver 205 can be used for receiving and processing the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 208 .
  • the transmitter 206 and the receiver 205 can be regarded as a wireless modem.
  • the network device 100 there may be one or more transmitters 206 and one or more receivers 205 .
  • Antenna 208 may be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line to electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space to electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • the coupler 207 is used to divide the mobile communication signals received by the antenna 208 into multiple paths and distribute them to multiple receivers 205 .
  • the memory 202 is coupled with the network device processor 201 and is used for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • the memory 202 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the memory 202 can store a network communication program, which can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, and one or more network devices.
  • the memory 202 may be used to store an implementation program of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the side of the network device 100 .
  • the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application please refer to the foregoing embodiments.
  • the network device processor 201 is operable to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the network device processor 201 can be used to call the program stored in the memory 202, such as the implementation program of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the network device 100 side, and execute the instructions contained in the program .
  • the network device 100 shown in FIG. 11 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the network device 100 may include more or fewer components, which is not limited here.
  • the structure of the network device 100 may be the same as that of the network device 100 , and related content about the structure of the network device 100 may refer to the related text description of the structure of the network device 100 shown in FIG. 11 , which will not be repeated here.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware.
  • the programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media.
  • When the programs are executed may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed in the present application is a beamforming method, applied to a terminal and a network device. A terminal comprises A TX channels; the A TX channels correspond to Y antennas; the terminal transmits, by means of the Y antennas, an antenna switching-sounding reference signal (AS-SRS) to a network device by means of single-antenna polling; the network device estimates an uplink channel matrix corresponding to a first antenna on the basis of the AS-SRS transmitted by the first antenna in the Y antennas, the first antenna being any one of the Y antennas; the network device determines, on the basis of the estimated uplink channel matrices corresponding to the Y antennas, hybrid beamforming (HBF) configuration information of a target transmission mode of the terminal; the network device sends the HBF configuration information to the terminal; the terminal determines the target transmission mode on the basis of the HBF configuration information. In this way, multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of a terminal can be fully utilized to improve the uplink transmission performance, achieving a higher beamforming gain.

Description

波束成形方法及相关装置Beamforming method and related device
本申请要求于2021年5月21日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110558386.8、申请名称为“波束成形方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with application number 202110558386.8 and application title "Beamforming Method and Related Devices" filed with China Patent Office on May 21, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及波束成形方法及相关装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the communication field, and in particular, to a beamforming method and a related device.
背景技术Background technique
随着移动通信技术和终端技术的发展,5G终端普遍对5G新空口(new radio,NR)时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)频段支持上行2发送(transmit,TX)通道。从理论上说,具备上行多TX通道的终端,可以采用波束成形(beamforming,BF)技术来补偿多天线的空口信道相位差,从而获得BF合并增益,提高上行信号的接收强度和信噪比。统计意义上,2TX通道可以达到3dB的BF增益,4TX通道可以达到6dB的BF增益。With the development of mobile communication technology and terminal technology, 5G terminals generally support uplink 2 transmit (TX) channels for the 5G new radio (NR) time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) frequency band. Theoretically, a terminal with multiple uplink TX channels can use beamforming (BF) technology to compensate the air interface channel phase difference of multiple antennas, so as to obtain BF combining gain and improve the receiving strength and signal-to-noise ratio of uplink signals. Statistically, the 2TX channel can achieve a BF gain of 3dB, and the 4TX channel can achieve a BF gain of 6dB.
然而,目前在实际应用中,并无有效的上行BF的技术方案能够充分利用终端的多TX通道和多天线来提升上行传输性能,实现更高的BF增益。However, currently in practical applications, there is no effective uplink BF technical solution that can make full use of multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of the terminal to improve uplink transmission performance and achieve higher BF gain.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了波束成形方法及相关装置,能够充分利用终端的多TX通道和多天线来提升上行传输性能,实现更高的BF增益。The present application provides a beamforming method and a related device, which can make full use of multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of a terminal to improve uplink transmission performance and achieve higher BF gain.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种波束成形方法,应用于终端,终端包括A个TX通道,上述A个TX通道对应Y根天线,A和Y为正整数,所述方法包括:终端通过上述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发探测参考信号(antenna switching-sounding reference signal,AS-SRS),AS-SRS用于网络设备估计上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵;终端接收网络设备发送的目标发送方式的混合波束成形(hybrid beamforming,HBF)配置信息,目标发送方式的HBF配置信息是网络设备基于上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵确定的;终端基于HBF配置信息,确定上行的目标发送方式。In the first aspect, the present application provides a beamforming method, which is applied to a terminal. The terminal includes A TX channels, and the above-mentioned A TX channels correspond to Y antennas, and A and Y are positive integers. The method includes: the terminal passes the above The Y antenna polls the network device with a single antenna, and the sending antenna polls the antenna switching-sounding reference signal (AS-SRS), and the AS-SRS is used by the network device to estimate the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas; the terminal Receiving the hybrid beamforming (hybrid beamforming, HBF) configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode is determined by the network device based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas; the terminal is based on the HBF configuration information, Determine the uplink target sending method.
实施本申请实施例,终端通过单天线向网络设备轮询发送AS-SRS,网络设备基于接收到的AS-SRS进行上行信道估计,并基于上行信道估计结果确定终端的上行的目标发送方式,并通过CSI反馈HBF配置信息,以向终端指示上述目标发送方式,这样,能够充分利用终端的多TX通道和多天线来提升上行传输性能,实现更高的BF增益。此外,由网络设备通过终端的每根天线的上行信道估计自适应地为终端选择上行的目标发送方式,无需依赖上下行信道互易性,适用于FDD频段和TDD频段,还可以自适应地应对各种实际的信道环境。Implementing the embodiment of the present application, the terminal polls the network device through a single antenna to send AS-SRS, and the network device performs uplink channel estimation based on the received AS-SRS, and determines the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal based on the uplink channel estimation result, and The HBF configuration information is fed back through the CSI to indicate the target transmission mode to the terminal. In this way, the multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of the terminal can be fully utilized to improve uplink transmission performance and achieve higher BF gain. In addition, the network equipment adaptively selects the uplink target transmission mode for the terminal through the uplink channel estimation of each antenna of the terminal, without relying on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, applicable to FDD frequency band and TDD frequency band, and can also be adaptively handled Various practical channel environments.
在一种实现方式中,上述HBF配置信息用于指示:在目标发送方式下,上述A个TX通道中上行发送的B个TX通道、上述B个TX通道的数字波束赋形(digital beamforming,DBF)的数字移相值、上述B个TX通道中第一TX通道对应的C根天线中上行发送的D根天线和/或上述D根天线的模拟波束成形(analog beamforming,ABF)的模拟移相值,第一TX通道是上述B个TX通道中的任一TX通道,B、C和D为正整数。In one implementation, the above HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the digital beamforming (digital beamforming, DBF) of the B TX channels for uplink transmission in the above A TX channels, and the above B TX channels ), the D antennas for uplink transmission among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel in the above B TX channels and/or the analog beamforming (analog beamforming, ABF) analog phase shift of the above D antennas value, the first TX channel is any TX channel in the above B TX channels, and B, C, and D are positive integers.
在一种实现方式中,上述终端通过上述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发 探测参考信号AS-SRS之前,还包括:终端向网络设备发送第一消息,第一消息用于上报终端的TX通道和天线配置,终端的TX通道和天线配置用于网络设备确定目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。In an implementation manner, before the above-mentioned terminal polls the network equipment with a single antenna through the above-mentioned Y antennas to send the AS-SRS, the terminal further includes: the terminal sends a first message to the network equipment, and the first message uses For reporting the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal, the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal are used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
由于不同的终端、不同的频段所支持的TX通道和天线的配置可能不同,实施本申请实施例,可以适配不同的终端和频段,以便于网络设备针对不同的配置自适应地确定该配置下的目标发送方式。Since the configurations of TX channels and antennas supported by different terminals and different frequency bands may be different, by implementing the embodiment of the present application, different terminals and frequency bands can be adapted, so that network devices can adaptively determine the configuration under different configurations. The destination delivery method for .
在一种实现方式中,上述终端通过上述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS之前,还包括:终端接收网络设备发送的终端的AS-SRS资源的配置信息,AS-SRS资源的配置信息是网络设备基于终端的TX通道和天线配置确定的;上述终端通过上述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS,具体包括:终端在AS-SRS资源上通过上述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送AS-SRS。In an implementation manner, before the above-mentioned terminal polls the network device through the above-mentioned Y antennas to send the AS-SRS with a single antenna, the terminal further includes: the terminal receiving the AS-SRS resource of the terminal sent by the network device Configuration information, AS-SRS resource configuration information is determined by the network device based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal; the terminal polls the network device with a single antenna through the above-mentioned Y antennas, and sends the AS-SRS to the sending antenna in turn, Specifically, the terminal polls and sends the AS-SRS to the network device with a single antenna through the above-mentioned Y antennas on the AS-SRS resource.
在一种实现方式中,上述终端接收网络设备发送的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息之前,还包括:终端向网络设备发送第二消息,第二消息用于上报终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,各TX通道支持的最大发送功率用于网络设备确定目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。In an implementation manner, before the terminal receives the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, the terminal further includes: the terminal sends a second message to the network device, and the second message is used to report the TX channels supported by the terminal The maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
由于针对不同的频段,协议允许的最大发送功率可能不同,且不同的TX通道支持的最大发送功率也可能不同,实施本申请实施例,可以适配不同的终端和频段,以便于网络设备针对不同的功率能力自适应地确定该功率能力下的目标发送方式。Since the maximum transmit power allowed by the protocol may be different for different frequency bands, and the maximum transmit power supported by different TX channels may also be different. Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals and frequency bands, so that network devices can target different The power capability of the power adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the power capability.
在一种实现方式中,上述终端接收网络设备发送的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息之前,还包括:终端向网络设备发送第三消息,第三消息用于上报终端支持的移相档位,终端支持的移相档位用于网络设备确定目标发送方式的HBF配置信息,移相档位包括ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。In an implementation manner, before the terminal receives the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, the terminal further includes: the terminal sends a third message to the network device, and the third message is used to report the phase-shifting profile supported by the terminal bit, the phase shifting gear supported by the terminal is used for the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode, and the phase shifting gear includes ABF phase shifting gear and/or DBF phase shifting gear.
由于具备不同的硬件性能和软件性能的终端,支持的ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位可能不同,实施本申请实施例,可以适配不同的终端,以便于网络设备针对不同的移相档位自适应地确定该移相档位下的目标发送方式。Due to terminals with different hardware performance and software performance, the supported ABF phase shifting gear and/or DBF phase shifting gear may be different. Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals, so that network devices can target different The phase shift gear adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the phase shift gear.
在一种实现方式中,上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵、终端的TX通道和天线配置、终端支持的移相档位以及终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,用于网络设备确定终端的各种上行发送方式下的等效信道增益,等效信道增益最大的上行发送方式为终端的目标发送方式。In one implementation, the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above Y antennas, the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal, the phase shifting gear supported by the terminal, and the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal are used by the network device to determine the terminal The equivalent channel gains in various uplink transmission modes, and the uplink transmission mode with the largest equivalent channel gain is the target transmission mode of the terminal.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种TX通道和天线配置的配置类型,第一消息携带终端的TX通道和天线配置的配置类型的索引。In an implementation manner, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the first message carries an index of the configuration type of the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种上述A个TX通道的功率能力类型,第二消息携带终端的功率能力类型的索引。In an implementation manner, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the above-mentioned A TX channels, and the second message carries an index of the power capability type of the terminal.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位的移相精度,第三消息携带终端的移相档位的移相精度,移相档位的移相精度包括ABF移相档位的移相精度和/或DBF移相档位的移相精度。In one implementation, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase-shifting precisions of the phase-shifting gears, and the third message carries the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears of the terminal, and the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears includes The phase shift accuracy of the ABF phase shift gear and/or the phase shift accuracy of the DBF phase shift gear.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位类型,第三消息携带终端的移相档位类型的索引,移相档位类型的索引包括ABF移相档位类型的索引和/或DBF移相档位类型的索引。In one implementation, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two types of phase shifting gears, the third message carries the index of the phase shifting gear type of the terminal, and the index of the phase shifting gear type includes the ABF phase shifting gear The index of the type and/or the index of the DBF shifting gear type.
第二方面,本申请提供了一种波束成形方法,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:网络设 备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的AS-SRS,终端包括A个TX通道,上述A个TX通道对应上述Y根天线,A和Y为正整数;网络设备基于上述Y根天线中的第一天线发送的AS-SRS,估计第一天线对应的上行信道矩阵,第一天线是上述Y根天线中的任一天线;网络设备基于估计的上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定终端的目标发送方式的HBF配置信息;网络设备向终端发送HBF配置信息。In the second aspect, the present application provides a beamforming method, which is applied to network equipment, and the method includes: the network equipment receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, and the terminal includes A TX channels, The above-mentioned A TX channels correspond to the above-mentioned Y antennas, and A and Y are positive integers; the network device estimates the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the first antenna based on the AS-SRS sent by the first antenna among the above-mentioned Y antennas, and the first antenna is Any one of the above-mentioned Y antennas; the network device determines HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas; the network device sends the HBF configuration information to the terminal.
实施本申请实施例,终端通过单天线向网络设备轮询发送AS-SRS,网络设备基于接收到的AS-SRS进行上行信道估计,并基于上行信道估计结果确定终端的上行的目标发送方式,并通过CSI反馈HBF配置信息,以向终端指示上述目标发送方式,这样,能够充分利用终端的多TX通道和多天线来提升上行传输性能,实现更高的BF增益。此外,由网络设备通过终端的每根天线的上行信道估计自适应地为终端选择上行的目标发送方式,无需依赖上下行信道互易性,适用于FDD频段和TDD频段,还可以自适应地应对各种实际的信道环境。Implementing the embodiment of the present application, the terminal polls the network device through a single antenna to send AS-SRS, and the network device performs uplink channel estimation based on the received AS-SRS, and determines the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal based on the uplink channel estimation result, and The HBF configuration information is fed back through the CSI to indicate the target transmission mode to the terminal. In this way, the multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of the terminal can be fully utilized to improve uplink transmission performance and achieve higher BF gain. In addition, the network equipment adaptively selects the uplink target transmission mode for the terminal through the uplink channel estimation of each antenna of the terminal, without relying on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, applicable to FDD frequency band and TDD frequency band, and can also be adaptively handled Various practical channel environments.
在一种实现方式中,上述HBF配置信息用于指示:在目标发送方式下,上述A个TX通道中上行发送的B个TX通道、上述B个TX通道的DBF数字移相值、上述B个TX通道中第一TX通道对应的C根天线中上行发送的D根天线和/或上述D根天线的ABF模拟移相值,第一TX通道是上述B个TX通道中的任一TX通道。In an implementation manner, the above HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the B TX channels for uplink transmission in the above A TX channels, the DBF digital phase shift values of the above B TX channels, the above B TX channels Among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel in the TX channel, the D antennas for uplink transmission and/or the ABF analog phase shift value of the above D antennas, the first TX channel is any TX channel among the above B TX channels.
在一种实现方式中,上述网络设备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的AS-SRS之前,还包括:网络设备接收终端发送的第一消息;网络设备基于第一消息确定终端的TX通道和天线配置,终端的TX通道和天线配置用于网络设备确定目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。In an implementation manner, before the network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, the network device further includes: the network device receives the first message sent by the terminal; the network device determines the terminal's address based on the first message TX channel and antenna configuration, the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
由于不同的终端、不同的频段所支持的TX通道和天线的配置可能不同,实施本申请实施例,可以适配不同的终端和频段,以便于网络设备针对不同的配置自适应地确定该配置下的目标发送方式。Since the configurations of TX channels and antennas supported by different terminals and different frequency bands may be different, by implementing the embodiment of the present application, different terminals and frequency bands can be adapted, so that network devices can adaptively determine the configuration under different configurations. The destination delivery method for .
在一种实现方式中,上述网络设备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的AS-SRS之前,还包括:网络设备基于终端的TX通道和天线配置确定终端的AS-SRS资源的配置信息;网络设备向终端发送AS-SRS资源的配置信息;上述网络设备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的AS-SRS,具体包括:网络设备接收终端在AS-SRS资源上通过上述Y根天线单天线地轮询发送AS-SRS。In an implementation manner, before the above network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, the network device further includes: the network device determines the AS-SRS resource configuration of the terminal based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal information; the network device sends AS-SRS resource configuration information to the terminal; the above-mentioned network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, specifically includes: the network device receives the terminal on the AS-SRS resource through the above-mentioned The Y antennas poll and send the AS-SRS with a single antenna.
在一种实现方式中,上述网络设备基于估计的上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定终端的目标发送方式的HBF配置信息之前,还包括:网络设备接收终端发送的第二消息;网络设备基于第二消息确定终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,各TX通道支持的最大发送功率用于网络设备确定目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。In an implementation manner, before the network device determines the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, the network device further includes: the network device receives the second message sent by the terminal; the network device The maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal is determined based on the second message, and the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
由于针对不同的频段,协议允许的最大发送功率可能不同,且不同的TX通道支持的最大发送功率也可能不同,实施本申请实施例,可以适配不同的终端和频段,以便于网络设备针对不同的功率能力自适应地确定该功率能力下的目标发送方式。Since the maximum transmit power allowed by the protocol may be different for different frequency bands, and the maximum transmit power supported by different TX channels may also be different. Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals and frequency bands, so that network devices can target different The power capability of the power adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the power capability.
在一种实现方式中,上述网络设备基于估计的上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定终端的目标发送方式的HBF配置信息之前,还包括:网络设备接收终端发送的第三消息;网络设备基于第三消息确定终端支持的移相档位,终端支持的移相档位用于网络设备确定目标发送方式的HBF配置信息,移相档位包括ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。In an implementation manner, before the network device determines the HBF configuration information of the terminal's target transmission mode based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, the network device further includes: the network device receives the third message sent by the terminal; the network device Determine the phase-shifting gear supported by the terminal based on the third message. The phase-shifting gear supported by the terminal is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode. The phase-shifting gear includes ABF phase-shifting gear and/or DBF phase-shifting gear bit.
由于具备不同的硬件性能和软件性能的终端,支持的ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位可能不同,实施本申请实施例,可以适配不同的终端,以便于网络设备针对不同的移相档位 自适应地确定该移相档位下的目标发送方式。Due to terminals with different hardware performance and software performance, the supported ABF phase shifting gear and/or DBF phase shifting gear may be different. Implementing the embodiment of this application can adapt to different terminals, so that network devices can target different The phase shift gear adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the phase shift gear.
在一种实现方式中,上述网络设备基于估计的上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定终端的目标发送方式的HBF配置信息,具体包括:基于估计的上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵、终端的TX通道和天线配置、终端支持的移相档位以及终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,确定终端的各种上行发送方式下的等效信道增益,并确定等效信道增益最大的上行发送方式为终端的目标发送方式,获取目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。In an implementation manner, the above-mentioned network device determines the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas, which specifically includes: based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above-mentioned Y antennas, The TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal, the phase shift gear supported by the terminal, and the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal determine the equivalent channel gain of the terminal in various uplink transmission modes, and determine the maximum equivalent channel gain The uplink transmission mode is the target transmission mode of the terminal, and the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode is acquired.
在一种实现方式中,上述网络设备基于估计的上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定终端的目标发送方式的HBF配置信息,具体包括:网络设备基于终端的TX通道和天线配置以及终端支持的移相档位,确定适用于终端的第一码本集;第一码本集包括Y个码字,第一码本集的每个码字的第y个码元用于表征上述Y根天线中的第y根天线对应的HBF权值;基于终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率对第一码本集进行功率修正,获得修正后的第二码本集,第二码本集的每个码字对应的发送总功率小于等于终端支持的最大发送功率,第二码本集的每个码字中第一TX通道的C根天线对应的C个码元的发送功率之和小于等于第一TX通道支持的最大发送功率,第二码本集的每个码字用于指示终端的一种上行发送方式;基于上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,获取第二码本集中每个码字对应的等效信道增益;基于第二码本集中等效信道增益最大的第一码字确定终端的目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。In an implementation manner, the above network device determines the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above Y antennas, which specifically includes: the network device based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal and the terminal support The phase-shifting position of the first codebook set applicable to the terminal is determined; the first codebook set includes Y codewords, and the y-th symbol of each codeword in the first codebook set is used to represent the above-mentioned Y root The HBF weight corresponding to the y-th antenna in the antenna; based on the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal, the power correction is performed on the first codebook set to obtain the corrected second codebook set, and the second codebook set The total transmission power corresponding to each codeword is less than or equal to the maximum transmission power supported by the terminal, and the sum of the transmission powers of the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel in each codeword of the second codebook set is less than or equal to The maximum transmission power supported by the first TX channel, and each codeword in the second codebook set is used to indicate an uplink transmission mode of the terminal; based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above Y antennas, obtain each codeword in the second codebook set The equivalent channel gain corresponding to the codeword; determining the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the first codeword with the largest equivalent channel gain in the second codebook set.
可选的,HBF配置信息为第一码字在码本集中的索引。Optionally, the HBF configuration information is an index of the first codeword in the codebook set.
在一种实现方式中,上述第一TX通道的C根天线对应的C个码元间的相位差为终端支持的ABF的移相档位,当上述A个TX通道还包括第二TX通道时,第一TX通道和第二YX通道的第一根天线对应的两个码元的相位差为终端支持的DBF的移相档位。In an implementation manner, the phase difference between the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel is the phase shift gear of the ABF supported by the terminal, when the A TX channels also include the second TX channel , the phase difference of the two symbols corresponding to the first antenna of the first TX channel and the second YX channel is the phase shifting gear of the DBF supported by the terminal.
在一种实现方式中,码字对应的等效信道增益为码字与上述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵的乘积向量的模平方。In an implementation manner, the equivalent channel gain corresponding to the codeword is the modulus square of the product vector of the codeword and the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种TX通道和天线配置的配置类型,第一消息携带终端的TX通道和天线配置的配置类型的索引。In an implementation manner, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the first message carries an index of the configuration type of the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种上述A个TX通道的功率能力类型,第二消息携带终端的功率能力类型的索引。In an implementation manner, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the above-mentioned A TX channels, and the second message carries an index of the power capability type of the terminal.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位的移相精度,第三消息携带终端的移相档位的移相精度,移相档位的移相精度包括ABF移相档位的移相精度和/或DBF移相档位的移相精度。In one implementation, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase-shifting precisions of the phase-shifting gears, and the third message carries the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears of the terminal, and the phase-shifting precision of the phase-shifting gears includes The phase shift accuracy of the ABF phase shift gear and/or the phase shift accuracy of the DBF phase shift gear.
在一种实现方式中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位类型的索引,第三消息携带终端的移相档位类型的索引,移相档位的索引包括ABF移相档位的索引和/或DBF移相档位的索引。In one implementation, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two indexes of phase shifting gear types, the third message carries the index of the phase shifting gear type of the terminal, and the index of phase shifting gears includes ABF phase shifting gear Index of bits and/or index of DBF shifting bins.
在一种实现方式中,当终端配置2个TX通道和4根天线,ABF移相档位和DBF移相档位的移相精度均为90°时,第一码本集为四端口的上行预编码矩阵指示TPMI码本;当终端配置1个TX通道和4根天线,ABF移相档位和DBF移相档位的移相精度均为90°时,第一码本集为四端口的TPMI码本;当终端配置1个TX通道和2根天线,ABF移相档位和DBF移相档位的移相精度均为90°时,第一码本集为两端口的TPMI码本。In one implementation, when the terminal is configured with 2 TX channels and 4 antennas, and the phase shifting accuracy of the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear are both 90°, the first codebook set is a four-port uplink The precoding matrix indicates the TPMI codebook; when the terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 4 antennas, and the phase shifting accuracy of the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear are both 90°, the first codebook set is a four-port TPMI codebook; when the terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 2 antennas, and the phase-shifting accuracy of the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear are both 90°, the first codebook set is a two-port TPMI codebook.
第三方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。该一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,使得通信装置执 行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式所提的方法。In a third aspect, the present application provides a communication device, including one or more processors and one or more memories. The one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, cause the communication device to perform The method mentioned in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
第四方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。该一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,使得通信装置执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式所提的方法。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a communications device, including one or more processors and one or more memories. The one or more memories are coupled with one or more processors, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, cause the communication device to perform The method mentioned in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得通信装置执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式所提的方法。In the fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions are run on the electronic device, cause the communication device to perform the method mentioned in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现方式所提的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method mentioned in any possible implementation manner of any of the above aspects.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信***的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种多天线信道模型的原理示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the principles of a multi-antenna channel model provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图3A至图3D为本申请实施例提供的收发框架的结构示意图;3A to 3D are schematic structural diagrams of the transceiver framework provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的收发框架的结构示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a transceiver framework provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5A至图5C为本申请实施例提供的发送框架示意图;5A to 5C are schematic diagrams of the sending framework provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的码字示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a codeword provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图7A为本申请实施例提供的波束成形方法的流程图;FIG. 7A is a flow chart of the beamforming method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7B和图7C为本申请实施例提供的上行波束成形的增益示意图;FIG. 7B and FIG. 7C are gain schematic diagrams of uplink beamforming provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种终端的结构示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一种网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of another network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、详尽地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or means, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the text is only a description of associated objects The association relationship indicates that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiment of the present application , "plurality" means two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the "multiple" The meaning is two or more.
首先对本申请实施例涉及的通信***进行介绍。Firstly, the communication system involved in the embodiment of the present application is introduced.
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信***10的示意图。该通信***10可以包括至少一个网络设备100(仅示出1个)以及与网络设备100连接的一个或多个终端200(仅示出1个)。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication system 10 may include at least one network device 100 (only one is shown) and one or more terminals 200 (only one is shown) connected to the network device 100 .
网络设备100可以通过一个或多根天线经下行链路(Downlink,DL)向终端200发送下行数据,终端200也可以通过一个或多根天线来经上行链路(Upink,UL)向网络设备100发送上行数据。本申请实施例中,网络设备100也可以被称为网络设备,终端200也可以被称为终端。The network device 100 can send downlink data to the terminal 200 through one or more antennas through the downlink (Downlink, DL), and the terminal 200 can also send downlink data to the network device 100 through the uplink (Uplink, UL) through one or more antennas. Send uplink data. In this embodiment of the present application, the network device 100 may also be called a network device, and the terminal 200 may also be called a terminal.
本申请实施例涉及的网络设备100是通过无线方式接入到该通信***中的接入设备,具有无线收发功能,该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),5G NR网络中的下一代节点B(next Generation Node B,gNB)、传输点(TRP或TP),或构成gNB或传输点的网络节点等等。本申请实施例对网络设备100所采用的具体无线接入技术和具体设备形态不作限定。The network device 100 involved in the embodiment of the present application is an access device that is wirelessly connected to the communication system and has a wireless transceiver function. The device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), wireless Network controller (radio network controller, RNC), node B (Node B, NB), base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB , or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), next-generation Node B (next Generation Node B, gNB), transmission point (TRP or TP) in the 5G NR network, or constitute gNB or transmission point network nodes and so on. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific wireless access technology and specific device form adopted by the network device 100 .
本申请实施例涉及的终端200可以是搭载iOS、Android、Microsoft或者其它操作***的终端。终端200也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动设备、用户终端、终端设备、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。示例性的,终端200可以是手机、平板电脑、桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、上网本,以及无人机、蜂窝电话、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)设备、可穿戴式设备、车载设备和/或智能家居设备等,本申请实施例对该终端200的具体类型不作特殊限制。The terminal 200 involved in this embodiment of the present application may be a terminal equipped with iOS, Android, Microsoft or other operating systems. The terminal 200 may also be called user equipment (user equipment, UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile device, user terminal, terminal device, wireless communication device, user agent or user device. Exemplarily, the terminal 200 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, a netbook, a drone, a cellular phone, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) device, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) device, wearable device, vehicle-mounted device and/or smart home device, etc., the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific type of the terminal 200.
网络设备100和终端200可以部署在陆地上,包括室内、室外、手持或车载,也可以部署在水面上,还可以部署在空中的飞机和人造卫星上,本申请实施例对此均不作限定。The network device 100 and the terminal 200 can be deployed on land, including indoors, outdoors, hand-held or vehicle-mounted, they can also be deployed on water, and they can also be deployed on airplanes and artificial satellites in the air, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应当理解,图1仅仅为本申请实施例提供的通信***的***结构示意图,该通信***中还可以包括其它设备,例如,还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备(图1中未示出),在此不作限定。It should be understood that FIG. 1 is only a schematic diagram of the system structure of the communication system provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the communication system may also include other devices, for example, wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices (not shown in FIG. 1 ). out), without limitation here.
下面对本申请实施例提供的波束成形方法涉及的技术概念进行就介绍。The technical concepts involved in the beamforming method provided in the embodiment of the present application are briefly introduced below.
1、多天线信道模型1. Multi-antenna channel model
无线通信***的传播环境包括视距(line of sight,LOS)和非视距(non-line of sight,NLOS)。LOS场景下,无线信号在发送端与接收端之间无遮挡的直线传播。示例性的,图2为LOS场景下终端200的多天线信道模型的原理示意图。如图2所示,终端200具有Y根均匀线性阵列天线,标记为天线0~天线Y-1。终端200和网络设备100间的上行信道矩阵H UL可以表示为: The propagation environment of the wireless communication system includes line-of-sight (LOS) and non-line-of-sight (NLOS). In the LOS scenario, the wireless signal propagates in a straight line without obstruction between the sender and receiver. Exemplarily, FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a multi-antenna channel model of the terminal 200 in a LOS scenario. As shown in FIG. 2 , the terminal 200 has Y uniform linear array antennas, which are marked as antenna 0 to antenna Y-1. The uplink channel matrix H UL between the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000001
其中,d表示相邻天线的间距,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000002
表示入射角,λ表示载波波长,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000003
表示相邻天线的波程差。H UL的行数是网络设备100的接收天线数,列数是终端200的发送天线数Y,h y表示天线y对应的上行信道,y=0,1,…,Y-1。信道也可以称为空口信道。
where d represents the distance between adjacent antennas,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000002
Indicates the incident angle, λ indicates the carrier wavelength,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000003
Indicates the wave path difference between adjacent antennas. The number of rows of H UL is the number of receiving antennas of the network device 100, the number of columns is the number Y of transmitting antennas of the terminal 200, h y represents the uplink channel corresponding to antenna y, and y=0,1,...,Y-1. A channel may also be called an air interface channel.
2、子带、CSI2. Subband, CSI
子带(subband):物理层反馈信道信息的频域粒度单位。***带宽可以划分为若干个子带,基于***带宽的不同,子带的大小可能是4个、6个或8个等资源块(resource block,RB)。RB为业务信道资源分配的资源单位,在频域上占用12个连续的子载波。本申请实施例中,子带也可以被称为子信道或频域单元。Subband (subband): The frequency domain granularity unit of the physical layer feedback channel information. The system bandwidth can be divided into several sub-bands, and the size of the sub-bands may be 4, 6 or 8 resource blocks (resource block, RB) based on different system bandwidths. RB is a resource unit allocated by traffic channel resources, and occupies 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. In this embodiment of the present application, a subband may also be called a subchannel or a frequency domain unit.
CSI信道状态信息(Channel State Information,CSI)是用来估计一条通信链路特性的信息,而估计CSI的过程便叫做信道估计。CSI包括但不限于预编码矩阵指示(precodingmatrix indicator,PMI)、秩指示(rank indicator,RI)、预编码类型指示(precoding type indicator,PTI)和信道质量信息(Channel Quality Indicator,CQI)中的一或多个,其所占的时频资源 是由网络设备来控制。CSI Channel State Information (CSI) is information used to estimate the characteristics of a communication link, and the process of estimating CSI is called channel estimation. CSI includes but is not limited to one of precoding matrix indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI), rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), precoding type indicator (precoding type indicator, PTI) and channel quality information (Channel Quality Indicator, CQI) or more, and the time-frequency resources occupied by them are controlled by network devices.
全带宽的CSI上报:接收终端针对目标链路占据的全带宽的CSI进行CSI上报。例如,上述全带宽的CSI是目标链路占据的所有子带的CSI的平均。Full-bandwidth CSI reporting: The receiving terminal reports CSI for the full-bandwidth CSI occupied by the target link. For example, the above-mentioned CSI of the full bandwidth is an average of CSIs of all subbands occupied by the target link.
子带级的CSI上报:接收终端针对目标链路占据的每个子带的CSI进行CSI上报。CSI reporting at the sub-band level: the receiving terminal reports CSI for the CSI of each sub-band occupied by the target link.
3、BF、BF增益3. BF, BF gain
BF基本原理为:发送端在利用多天线发送信号时,可以通过调整每根天线的加权系数,产生具有指向性的波束,使得多天线中每根天线发送的信号到达接收端时相干叠加,提高了上行信号接收强度和信噪比,获得BF增益。其中:The basic principle of BF is: when the sending end uses multiple antennas to send signals, it can generate directional beams by adjusting the weighting coefficients of each antenna, so that the signals sent by each antenna in the multi-antennas can be coherently superimposed when they arrive at the receiving end, improving The received strength and signal-to-noise ratio of the uplink signal are improved, and the BF gain is obtained. in:
加权系数,也称为权值,是指天线发送信号时使用的幅度和/或相位。调整天线使用的幅度和/或相位可以称为加权。相干是指多根天线发送的信号可以按照相同相位或者相近相位到达接收端。移相是指调整多天线发送信号时使用的相位。Weighting coefficients, also known as weights, refer to the amplitude and/or phase used by the antenna to transmit the signal. Adjusting the amplitude and/or phase used by the antennas may be referred to as weighting. Coherence means that the signals sent by multiple antennas can reach the receiving end according to the same phase or similar phase. Phase shifting refers to adjusting the phase used when multiple antennas transmit signals.
在一种应用场景中,发送端的Y根发送天线对应的信道完全相关,只存在由于无线信号的波程差引起的相位差异。发送端通过上述Y根发送天线发送信号时,可以采用BF技术对上述Y根天线发送的信号进行适当地相位偏移,相比于使用相同的总功率在单根天线上发送信号,通过上述BF技术可以使接收信号获得(10lgY)dB的BF增益。In one application scenario, the channels corresponding to the Y transmitting antennas at the transmitting end are completely correlated, and there is only a phase difference caused by a wave path difference of wireless signals. When the transmitting end transmits signals through the above-mentioned Y transmitting antennas, BF technology can be used to appropriately phase-shift the signals transmitted by the above-mentioned Y antennas. Compared with using the same total power to transmit signals on a single antenna, the above-mentioned BF Technology can make the received signal obtain (10lgY) dB BF gain.
目前,5G NR的频率范围(frequency range,FR)包括FR1和FR2。示例性的,支持5G FR1的终端,1个TX通道与1根天线对应;理论上,对于具备2TX通道和2根天线的终端,BF增益为(10lg2)dB,即3dB;对于具备4TX通道和4根天线的终端,BF增益为(10lg4)dB,即6dB。Currently, the frequency range (frequency range, FR) of 5G NR includes FR1 and FR2. Exemplarily, for a terminal supporting 5G FR1, one TX channel corresponds to one antenna; theoretically, for a terminal with 2TX channels and two antennas, the BF gain is (10lg2)dB, which is 3dB; for a terminal with 4TX channels and For a terminal with 4 antennas, the BF gain is (10lg4)dB, that is, 6dB.
在另一种应用场景中,Y根发送天线对应的信道只有部分相关性,除了存在相位差异之外还存在幅度差异。信道的最大特征分量在信道总功率中所占的比例记为ρ,ρ>1/N。以信道的最大特征方向作为BF发送权值,来对上行信号进行加权发送,获得的BF增益为(10lgρN)dB。可见,天线间信道相关性越高,最大特征分量的比例ρ越大,BF增益越大。In another application scenario, the channels corresponding to the Y transmitting antennas are only partially correlated, and there are amplitude differences in addition to phase differences. The proportion of the largest characteristic component of the channel in the total channel power is recorded as ρ, ρ>1/N. The maximum characteristic direction of the channel is used as the BF sending weight to carry out weighted sending on the uplink signal, and the obtained BF gain is (10lgρN)dB. It can be seen that the higher the channel correlation between antennas, the larger the ratio ρ of the largest eigencomponent, and the larger the BF gain.
4、终端收发框架、TX通道4. Terminal transceiver frame, TX channel
图3A为本申请实施例提供的终端200的收发框架的一种结构示意图。如图3A所示,终端200的收发框架可以划分为基带、射频(radio frequency,RF)和天线三部分。基带可以包括调制解调(modulator-demodulator,modem)模块,modem模块用于对基带信号进行处理。射频可以包括射频集成电路(radio frequency integrated circuit,RFIC)和射频前端(radio frequency front end,RFFE),RFIC和RFFE用于对射频信号进行处理。天线用于接收信号或发射信号。FIG. 3A is a schematic structural diagram of a transceiver framework of a terminal 200 provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3A , the transceiver framework of the terminal 200 can be divided into three parts: baseband, radio frequency (radio frequency, RF) and antenna. The baseband may include a modulator-demodulator (modem) module, and the modem module is used to process the baseband signal. The radio frequency may include a radio frequency integrated circuit (radio frequency integrated circuit, RFIC) and a radio frequency front end (radio frequency front end, RFFE), and the RFIC and the RFFE are used to process radio frequency signals. Antennas are used to receive signals or transmit signals.
其中,基带的每个端口都唯一连接一个射频通道,一个射频通道可以连接到一或多根物理天线。3GPP定义的发送端口(port)指可以独立发送一路信号的通道(该通道可以称为发送通道(TX)),接收端口指可以独立接收一路信号的通道(该通道可以称为接收通道RX)。在基带领域通常使用端口的概念,而在射频领域通常使用通道的概念,在本文中以通道为例进行说明。Wherein, each port of the baseband is uniquely connected to one radio frequency channel, and one radio frequency channel may be connected to one or more physical antennas. The transmission port (port) defined by 3GPP refers to a channel that can independently transmit a signal (the channel can be called a transmission channel (TX)), and the receiving port refers to a channel that can independently receive a signal (the channel can be called a reception channel RX). The concept of a port is usually used in the baseband field, and the concept of a channel is usually used in the radio frequency field. In this article, a channel is used as an example for illustration.
本申请实施例对终端200的TX通道的个数、RX通道的个数、天线的个数均不做具体限定。示例性的,图2所示的终端200的收发框架包括2个TX通道(即TX0和TX1),4个RX通道(即RX0至RX3),以及4根天线(即天线1至天线4)。The embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of TX channels, the number of RX channels, and the number of antennas of the terminal 200 . Exemplarily, the transceiver frame of the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 2 includes 2 TX channels (ie TX0 and TX1), 4 RX channels (ie RX0 to RX3), and 4 antennas (ie antenna 1 to antenna 4).
目前,支持5G FR1的终端,1个TX通道与1根天线对应,1个RX通道与1根天线对应,而支持5G FR2的终端,1个TX通道可以与2根天线对应,1个RX通道可以与2根天 线对应。需要说明的是,终端200可以支持2G~5G通信中的各种频段,不同的频段可以对应不同的天线配置,本申请实施例对每种频段的天线个数不做限定。例如,5G NR的频率范围包括FR1和FR2。对于终端,5G FR1中的Sub6G和Sub3G频段通常可以分别对应4根天线。Currently, for terminals supporting 5G FR1, one TX channel corresponds to one antenna, one RX channel corresponds to one antenna, while for terminals supporting 5G FR2, one TX channel corresponds to two antennas, and one RX channel corresponds to Compatible with 2 antennas. It should be noted that the terminal 200 can support various frequency bands in 2G-5G communication, and different frequency bands can correspond to different antenna configurations. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of antennas for each frequency band. For example, the frequency range of 5G NR includes FR1 and FR2. For terminals, the Sub6G and Sub3G frequency bands in 5G FR1 can usually correspond to 4 antennas respectively.
为了方便说明,本申请实施例将配置a个TX通道、b根天线的终端称为a T/b配置的终端。例如,具有2个TX通道、4根天线的终端称为2T/4配置的终端。For convenience of description, in this embodiment of the present application, a terminal configured with a TX channels and b antennas is referred to as a T/b configured terminal. For example, a terminal with 2 TX channels and 4 antennas is called a 2T/4 configured terminal.
5、ABF、DBF、HBF5. ABF, DBF, HBF
根据BF发生位置的不同,BF可以包括:ABF、DBF和HBF。如图3A所示,BF的发生位置可以包括基带和/或射频。According to the location of BF, BF can include: ABF, DBF and HBF. As shown in FIG. 3A , locations where BF occurs may include baseband and/or radio frequency.
ABF,是指通过射频的控制对TX通道对应的多根天线加权实现的BF,即通过RFIC和RFFE在模拟域对各天线对应的模拟信号进行加权。ABF的硬件结构简单,实现成本较低。ABF中使用的波束可以称为模拟波束。通常,ABF可以调整模拟波束的相位,不能调整模拟波束的幅度。此外,ABF使用移相器调整模拟波束的相位,可调整的相位个数有限,取决于移相器的实现;ABF仅能对模拟信号作全带宽的移相,不能针对不同子带分别作子带级的移相。ABF refers to the BF implemented by weighting the multiple antennas corresponding to the TX channel through radio frequency control, that is, weighting the analog signals corresponding to each antenna in the analog domain through RFIC and RFFE. The hardware structure of ABF is simple, and the realization cost is low. The beams used in ABF may be referred to as analog beams. In general, ABF can adjust the phase of the analog beam, but not the amplitude of the analog beam. In addition, ABF uses a phase shifter to adjust the phase of the analog beam. The number of adjustable phases is limited and depends on the implementation of the phase shifter; ABF can only shift the phase of the full bandwidth of the analog signal, and cannot perform sub-bands for different sub-bands. Phase shifting with stages.
示例性的,如图3B所示,终端200具备TX0通道,TX0通道连接到天线0和天线1。终端200可以对TX0通道连接的两根天线对应的模拟信号进行加权,实现上行ABF。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 3B , the terminal 200 has a TX0 channel, and the TX0 channel is connected to antenna 0 and antenna 1 . The terminal 200 may weight the analog signals corresponding to the two antennas connected to the TX0 channel to implement uplink ABF.
DBF,是指通过基带的控制对多个TX通道加权实现的BF,即通过modem在数字域对各TX通道对应的数字信号进行加权。DBF对端口的处理能力的要求较高,功耗和硬件实现成本较高。DBF中使用的波束可以称为数字波束。通常,DBF可以调整数字波束的相位,也可以调整数字波束的幅度。此外,基带通过软件调整数字波束的相位,可调整的相位可以为任意数值,即相位调整的精确度很高;DBF即能对数字信号作全带宽的移相,又能针对不同子带分别作子带级的移相。DBF refers to the BF implemented by weighting multiple TX channels through baseband control, that is, the digital signal corresponding to each TX channel is weighted in the digital domain through the modem. The DBF has high requirements on the processing capability of the port, and the power consumption and hardware implementation cost are relatively high. The beams used in DBF may be called digital beams. Usually, DBF can adjust the phase of the digital beam, and can also adjust the amplitude of the digital beam. In addition, the baseband adjusts the phase of the digital beam through software, and the adjustable phase can be any value, that is, the accuracy of the phase adjustment is very high; DBF can not only perform full-bandwidth phase shift for digital signals, but also perform phase shifts for different sub-bands. Phase shifting at the subband level.
示例性的,如图3C所示,终端200具备2个TX通道,即TX0通道和TX1通道,TX0通道连接到一或多根天线(例如天线0),TX1通道也连接到一或多根天线(例如天线1)。终端200可以对上述2个TX通道对应的数字信号进行加权,实现上行DBF。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 3C , the terminal 200 has two TX channels, namely TX0 channel and TX1 channel, TX0 channel is connected to one or more antennas (such as antenna 0), and TX1 channel is also connected to one or more antennas (eg Antenna 1). The terminal 200 may weight the digital signals corresponding to the above two TX channels to implement uplink DBF.
可以理解,若终端200仅具备1个TX通道,则无法实现DBF;若终端200的一个TX通道(例如图3C所示TX0通道)仅连接一根天线,则针对该TX通道无法实现ABF。It can be understood that if the terminal 200 has only one TX channel, DBF cannot be realized; if one TX channel of the terminal 200 (such as the TX0 channel shown in FIG. 3C ) is only connected to one antenna, then ABF cannot be realized for this TX channel.
HBF,是指综合ABF和DBF实现的BF,即通过基带的控制对多个TX通道加权后,又通过射频的控制对TX通道对应的多根天线加权。HBF refers to the BF implemented by integrating ABF and DBF, that is, after weighting multiple TX channels through baseband control, and then weighting multiple antennas corresponding to the TX channel through radio frequency control.
示例性的,如图3D所示,终端200具备2个TX通道,即TX0通道和TX1通道,TX0通道连接到多根天线(例如天线0和天线1),TX1通道也连接到多根天线(例如天线2和天线3)。终端200可以对上述2个TX通道对应的数字信号进行加权,实现上行DBF;终端200还可以对TX0通道连接的两根天线对应的模拟信号进行加权,实现TX0通道的上行ABF;终端200还可以对TX1通道连接的两根天线对应的模拟信号进行加权,实现TX1通道的上行ABF。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 3D, the terminal 200 has two TX channels, that is, a TX0 channel and a TX1 channel. The TX0 channel is connected to multiple antennas (such as antenna 0 and antenna 1), and the TX1 channel is also connected to multiple antennas ( For example Antenna 2 and Antenna 3). The terminal 200 can weight the digital signals corresponding to the above two TX channels to realize uplink DBF; the terminal 200 can also weight the analog signals corresponding to the two antennas connected to the TX0 channel to realize the uplink ABF of the TX0 channel; the terminal 200 can also The analog signals corresponding to the two antennas connected to the TX1 channel are weighted to realize the uplink ABF of the TX1 channel.
为便于描述合区分,将ABF中模拟信号的相位调整量简称为模拟移相值,ABF权值指示了各天线的模拟移相值;将DBF中数字信号的相位调整量简称为数字移相值,DBF权值指示了各TX通道的数字移相值。For ease of description and distinction, the phase adjustment amount of the analog signal in ABF is referred to as the analog phase shift value, and the ABF weight indicates the analog phase shift value of each antenna; the phase adjustment amount of the digital signal in the DBF is referred to as the digital phase shift value , the DBF weight indicates the digital phase shift value of each TX channel.
需要说明的是,图3A至图3D仅仅为本申请实施例提供的示例性的收发框架示意图,该收发框架中还可以包括更多或更少的硬件,此处不做具体限定。例如,图3B至图3D所示的 终端200的收发框架图还可以包括一或多个RX通道(图中未示出)。It should be noted that FIG. 3A to FIG. 3D are only schematic diagrams of an exemplary transceiving framework provided by the embodiment of the present application, and the transceiving framework may also include more or less hardware, which is not specifically limited here. For example, the transceiving frame diagrams of the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 3B to FIG. 3D may also include one or more RX channels (not shown in the figure).
6、AS-SRS6. AS-SRS
探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)是用于测量上行信道的一种参考信号,网络设备100可以基于终端200发送的SRS进行上行信道估计,以获取上行信道的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),进而便于上行资源调度。目前通信协议(例如,NR协议)为SRS配置了多种功能,SRS的功能通常包括:确定基于码本的物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)的传输方式,确定非码本的PUSCH的传输方式,天线切换(antenna switching)功能以及管理波束等。A sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) is a reference signal used to measure an uplink channel. The network device 100 may perform uplink channel estimation based on the SRS sent by the terminal 200 to obtain channel state information (channel state information, CSI), thereby facilitating uplink resource scheduling. The current communication protocol (for example, NR protocol) configures a variety of functions for the SRS. The functions of the SRS usually include: determining the transmission mode of the physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) based on the codebook, and determining the non-codebook PUSCH The transmission mode, antenna switching (antenna switching) function and management beam, etc.
由于各个功能对SRS的需求不同,导致各个功能的SRS的资源配置也有所差异。本申请实施例中,终端200需要通过天线切换(也可以称为天线轮询)的方式来发送SRS,为便于描述,将通过天线切换方式发送的SRS简称为AS-SRS,AS-SRS的资源可以简称为AS-SRS资源。Since each function has different requirements on the SRS, the resource allocation of the SRS of each function is also different. In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal 200 needs to transmit SRS through antenna switching (also called antenna polling). For the convenience of description, the SRS transmitted through antenna switching is referred to as AS-SRS for short. It may be referred to as AS-SRS resource for short.
本申请实施例中,终端200会向网络设备100上报终端200支持的TX通道和天线的数量,相应地,网络设备100根据TX通道和天线的数量为终端200配置AS-SRS资源,以便终端200在AS-SRS资源上传输AS-SRS。AS-SRS资源的资源粒度包括但不限于时域(例如时隙、子帧、符号等)、频域(子载波、带宽、RB等)、码域(例如导频、训练序列、同步序列等)、空域(例如发送天线、接收天线、波束等)。In the embodiment of this application, the terminal 200 will report the number of TX channels and antennas supported by the terminal 200 to the network device 100, and accordingly, the network device 100 configures AS-SRS resources for the terminal 200 according to the number of TX channels and antennas, so that the terminal 200 AS-SRS is transmitted on AS-SRS resources. The resource granularity of AS-SRS resources includes but not limited to time domain (such as time slot, subframe, symbol, etc.), frequency domain (subcarrier, bandwidth, RB, etc.), code domain (such as pilot frequency, training sequence, synchronization sequence, etc. ), airspace (e.g. transmit antenna, receive antenna, beam, etc.).
下面对本申请实施例提供的一种波束成形方案进行具体介绍。A beamforming solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is specifically introduced below.
第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)协议定义了2TX通道和4TX通道分别对应的上行相干码本,参见协议38.211中的6.3.1.5节。码本是一种预先定义的量化的移相值。本申请实施例提供的一种波束成形方法中,终端200可以利用上述上行相干码本实现上行BF。为便于描述,后续实施例中将该波束成形方法简称为方案一。The 3rd generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) protocol defines the uplink coherent codebooks corresponding to the 2TX channel and the 4TX channel respectively, see section 6.3.1.5 in the protocol 38.211. A codebook is a pre-defined quantized phase shift value. In a beamforming method provided in an embodiment of the present application, the terminal 200 may use the above-mentioned uplink coherent codebook to implement uplink BF. For ease of description, the beamforming method is simply referred to as Solution 1 in the following embodiments.
具体的,方案一中,终端200和网络设备100可以交互能力信息,确定两设备均支持协议规定的上行相干码本。终端200可以向网络设备100发送上行参考信号;网络设备100根据终端200发送的上行参考信号进行上行信道估计,在上行相干码本中确定目标码字;网络设备100向终端200发送目标码字的码字索引;终端200根据网络设备100发送的码字索引确定目标码字,并根据目标码字对多个TX通道的信号进行移相,以进行上行BF发送。Specifically, in Solution 1, the terminal 200 and the network device 100 may exchange capability information to determine that both devices support the uplink coherent codebook specified in the protocol. The terminal 200 can send an uplink reference signal to the network device 100; the network device 100 performs uplink channel estimation according to the uplink reference signal sent by the terminal 200, and determines the target codeword in the uplink coherent codebook; the network device 100 sends the target codeword to the terminal 200 Codeword index: the terminal 200 determines the target codeword according to the codeword index sent by the network device 100, and shifts the phases of signals of multiple TX channels according to the target codeword to perform uplink BF transmission.
该方案存在如下问题:There are following problems in this scheme:
1、目前,终端200普遍支持2TX通道。此外,由于射频器件成本、占用面积、功耗等问题,终端200通常不支持4TX通道。针对配置2个TX通道的终端200,网络设备100会根据2个TX通道对应的信道估计,选择一个2天线的权值反馈给终端200,协议并不支持网络设备100选择一个4天线的权值反馈给终端200,因此,该方案中配置4根天线的终端200无法实现更高的BF增益。如果不对协议作改进,终端200自行实现2个TX通道到4根天线的映射,依赖于上下行信道互易性,这需要增加硬件成本,同时也需要基带软件增加上述映射关系的计算。此外,由于这种解决方式依赖于上下行信道互易性,该解决方式仅适用于TDD频段,对FDD频段不适用。1. At present, terminal 200 generally supports 2TX channels. In addition, due to issues such as radio frequency device cost, occupied area, and power consumption, the terminal 200 generally does not support 4TX channels. For the terminal 200 configured with 2 TX channels, the network device 100 will select a 2-antenna weight to feed back to the terminal 200 according to the channel estimation corresponding to the 2 TX channels. The protocol does not support the network device 100 to select a 4-antenna weight. Feedback is given to the terminal 200. Therefore, in this solution, the terminal 200 configured with 4 antennas cannot achieve a higher BF gain. If no improvement is made to the protocol, the terminal 200 realizes the mapping from 2 TX channels to 4 antennas by itself, depending on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, which requires an increase in hardware costs, and also requires baseband software to increase the calculation of the above mapping relationship. In addition, because this solution depends on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, this solution is only applicable to the TDD frequency band, not to the FDD frequency band.
2、即使协议中定义的上行相干码本可以实现,具备2个TX通道的终端200的上行BF增益最大为3dB,无法实现更高的BF增益。2. Even if the uplink coherent codebook defined in the protocol can be realized, the uplink BF gain of the terminal 200 with two TX channels is at most 3dB, and a higher BF gain cannot be achieved.
3、协议中定义的上行相干码本,量化粒度较粗,目前包括{0°、90°、180°、270°}这四组移相档位。如果TX通道对应的天线之间的波程差不是以上四个相位,将不能获得理论上的 最大增益。3. The uplink coherent codebook defined in the agreement has a relatively coarse quantization granularity, and currently includes four groups of phase-shifting gears {0°, 90°, 180°, 270°}. If the wave length difference between the antennas corresponding to the TX channel is not the above four phases, the theoretical maximum gain will not be obtained.
下面对本申请实施例提供的另一种波束成形方案进行具体介绍。Another beamforming solution provided by the embodiment of the present application will be specifically introduced below.
对于支持5G FR2的终端,可以实现1个TX通道或RX通道驱动多根天线,实现上行ABF。此外,FR2的通信协议中设置了专门的波束轮询时隙,用于终端遍历多个模拟波束。For terminals supporting 5G FR2, one TX channel or RX channel can drive multiple antennas to realize uplink ABF. In addition, a special beam polling time slot is set in the communication protocol of FR2, which is used for the terminal to traverse multiple analog beams.
本申请实施例提供的另一种波束成形方法中,终端200可以利用预设的若干波束轮询,来选择目标模拟波束,从而实现上行ABF。为便于描述,后续实施例中该波束成形方法简称为方案二。In another beamforming method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal 200 may use preset several beam polling to select a target analog beam, so as to realize uplink ABF. For ease of description, the beamforming method in subsequent embodiments is referred to as scheme two for short.
具体的,方案二中,终端200的一路TX通道(例如TX0通道)和RX通道(例如RX0通道)连接到一个移相网络控制的多天线阵列上,终端200的Modem控制这个移相网络在预设的若干模拟波束中轮询。如果是TDD频段,终端200的Modem根据各模拟波束对应的信道估计,选择RX0通道接收到的接收功率最大的模拟波束用于后续的上行ABF;如果是FDD频段,基站确定终端200使用TX0通道发送的导频中上行接收功率最强的导频对应的模拟波束,并将该模拟波束反馈给终端200,终端200采用该模拟波束进行后续的上行ABF。Specifically, in Solution 2, one TX channel (such as TX0 channel) and RX channel (such as RX0 channel) of terminal 200 is connected to a multi-antenna array controlled by a phase-shifting network, and the Modem of terminal 200 controls the phase-shifting network to Polling among several simulated beams set up. If it is the TDD frequency band, the Modem of the terminal 200 selects the analog beam with the highest received power received by the RX0 channel for the subsequent uplink ABF according to the channel estimation corresponding to each analog beam; if it is the FDD frequency band, the base station determines that the terminal 200 uses the TX0 channel to transmit Among the pilots, the simulated beam corresponding to the pilot with the strongest uplink received power is fed back to the terminal 200, and the terminal 200 uses the simulated beam to perform subsequent uplink ABF.
示例性的,图4为支持5G FR1的终端200的一种收发框架的结构示意图。其中,TX0通道和RX0通道连接到一个移相网络控制的多天线阵列上,该多天线阵列包括天线0和天线1,Modem控制上述移相网络在预设的若干模拟波束中轮询,来选择上行发送的目标模拟波束。Exemplarily, FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a transceiver framework of a terminal 200 supporting 5G FR1. Among them, the TX0 channel and the RX0 channel are connected to a multi-antenna array controlled by a phase-shifting network. The multi-antenna array includes antenna 0 and antenna 1. The Modem controls the above-mentioned phase-shifting network to poll among preset analog beams to select Target analog beam for uplink transmission.
该方案存在如下问题:There are following problems in this scheme:
1、目前,终端200下行通常支持4个RX通道,但是,ABF技术中1个RX通道需要至少2根天线。这样,本方案中,为了实现上行BF且确保下行4个RX通道,具备1个TX通道的终端需要包括1个移相网络以及至少5根天线;具备2个TX通道终端需要包括2个移相网络以及至少6根天线。本方案需要额外增加天线,这将导致硬件成本增加,而且受限于终端的尺寸、射频器件占用面积、功耗等问题,实际应用中增加天线是非常困难的。1. At present, the downlink of the terminal 200 usually supports 4 RX channels, but in the ABF technology, 1 RX channel requires at least 2 antennas. In this way, in this solution, in order to achieve uplink BF and ensure 4 downlink RX channels, a terminal with 1 TX channel needs to include 1 phase-shifting network and at least 5 antennas; a terminal with 2 TX channels needs to include 2 phase-shifting network and at least 6 antennas. This solution requires additional antennas, which will lead to increased hardware costs, and is limited by the size of the terminal, the area occupied by radio frequency devices, and power consumption. It is very difficult to add antennas in practical applications.
2、FR1的协议中没有设置波束轮询时隙,终端200遍历模拟波束的操作是非标准的,会打断FR1频段的正常接收,影响下行通信。此外,如果终端200遍历到与当前信道近似正交的模拟波束时,会导致下行接收信号的强度掉底,严重影响下行通信。2. There is no beam polling time slot set in the FR1 protocol, and the operation of the terminal 200 traversing the analog beam is non-standard, which will interrupt the normal reception of the FR1 frequency band and affect the downlink communication. In addition, if the terminal 200 traverses an analog beam that is approximately orthogonal to the current channel, the strength of the downlink received signal will drop to the bottom, seriously affecting the downlink communication.
本申请实施例还提供了一种波束成形方法,应用于终端200和网络设备100。所提方法中终端200的发送框架支持1个TX通道对应2根天线;终端200和网络设备100可以交互功率能力、TX通道和天线配置、移相档位等信息,终端200通过单天线向网络设备100轮询发送AS-SRS,网络设备100基于接收到的AS-SRS进行上行信道估计,并基于上行信道估计结果和上述交互信息确定终端200的上行的目标发送方式,并通过CSI反馈向终端200指示上述目标发送方式。这样,所提能够充分利用终端200的多TX通道和多天线来提升上行传输性能,实现更高的BF增益,同时,有效避免方案1和方案2存在的问题。下面对上述波束成形方法进行详细介绍。The embodiment of the present application also provides a beamforming method, which is applied to the terminal 200 and the network device 100 . In the proposed method, the transmission framework of the terminal 200 supports 1 TX channel corresponding to 2 antennas; the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can exchange information such as power capability, TX channel and antenna configuration, phase shifting gear, etc., and the terminal 200 transmits information to the network through a single antenna. The device 100 polls and sends the AS-SRS, and the network device 100 performs uplink channel estimation based on the received AS-SRS, and determines the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal 200 based on the uplink channel estimation result and the above-mentioned interaction information, and feeds back to the terminal through CSI 200 indicates the above-mentioned destination delivery method. In this way, the proposed method can make full use of the multiple TX channels and multiple antennas of the terminal 200 to improve uplink transmission performance, achieve higher BF gain, and at the same time, effectively avoid the problems existing in scheme 1 and scheme 2. The foregoing beamforming method will be described in detail below.
下面对本申请实施例提供的波束成形方法涉及的几种发送框架进行介绍。Several sending frameworks involved in the beamforming method provided by the embodiment of the present application are introduced below.
发送框架1send frame 1
示例性的,以终端200配置2个TX通道(即TX0和TX1)和4根天线(即天线0至天线3)为例,图5A示出了本申请实施例涉及的终端200的一种发送框架的结构示意图。为便于描述,后续简称为发送框架1,如图5A所示,该发送框架包括modem 20、RFIC 21以及 RFFE 22。其中:Exemplarily, taking terminal 200 configured with 2 TX channels (ie, TX0 and TX1) and 4 antennas (ie, antenna 0 to antenna 3) as an example, FIG. 5A shows a transmission method of terminal 200 involved in this embodiment of the present application. Schematic diagram of the framework. For the convenience of description, it will be referred to as the transmission frame 1 in the following. As shown in FIG. 5A, the transmission frame includes a modem 20, RFIC 21 and RFFE 22. in:
modem 20包括发送通道选择(Transmit Channel Selection,TXS)及数字波束成形模块201,为便于描述,将该模块简称为TXS/DBF模块。TXS/DBF模块是基带的Modem中的软件模块,用于实现单TX通道的选择和信号发送,或者实现多TX通道的DBF发送。示例性的,TXS/DBF模块可以在上述2个TX通道选择一个TX通道(例如TX0或TX1)发送信号。示例性的,TXS/DBF模块还可以选择上述2个TX通道共同发送信号,并对TX1通道对应的数字信号进行数字移相,以实现上行DBF。The modem 20 includes a transmit channel selection (Transmit Channel Selection, TXS) and digital beamforming module 201, which is referred to as a TXS/DBF module for ease of description. The TXS/DBF module is a software module in the baseband Modem, which is used to realize the selection and signal transmission of a single TX channel, or realize the DBF transmission of multiple TX channels. Exemplarily, the TXS/DBF module may select a TX channel (such as TX0 or TX1 ) among the above two TX channels to send signals. Exemplarily, the TXS/DBF module may also select the above two TX channels to transmit signals together, and perform digital phase shift on the digital signal corresponding to the TX1 channel, so as to realize uplink DBF.
RFFE 22包括功率放大器221、功率放大器222以及天线选择(Antenna Selection,AS)及模拟波束成形模块223,为便于描述,将该模块简称为AS/ABF模块。功率放大器221与TX0通道连接,用于对TX0通道的输出信号进行功率放大;功率放大器222与TX1通道连接,用于对TX1通道的输出信号进行功率放大;AS/ABF模块与上述两个功率放大器连接,用于实现每个TX通道对应的单天线的选择和信号发送,或者实现每个TX通道对应的多天线ABF发送。The RFFE 22 includes a power amplifier 221, a power amplifier 222, and an antenna selection (Antenna Selection, AS) and analog beamforming module 223. For ease of description, this module is referred to as the AS/ABF module for short. The power amplifier 221 is connected to the TX0 channel for power amplification of the output signal of the TX0 channel; the power amplifier 222 is connected to the TX1 channel for power amplification of the output signal of the TX1 channel; the AS/ABF module and the above two power amplifiers The connection is used to realize the selection and signal transmission of a single antenna corresponding to each TX channel, or realize the multi-antenna ABF transmission corresponding to each TX channel.
AS/ABF模块可以包括与功率放大器221连接的多路开关0、功分器0、移相器0、滤波器0和滤波器1,还可以包括与功率放大器222连接的多路开关1、功分器1、移相器1、滤波器2和滤波器3。其中:The AS/ABF module may include a multi-way switch 0, a power divider 0, a phase shifter 0, a filter 0, and a filter 1 connected to the power amplifier 221, and may also include a multi-way switch 1 connected to the power amplifier 222, a power Splitter 1, Phase Shifter 1, Filter 2, and Filter 3. in:
多路开关连接的TX通道对应n根天线时,多路开关用于控制上述TX通道同时与上述n根天线连接,或者与上述n根天线中的单根天线连接;功分器用于根据控制信号将输入信号分成n路功率相等的信号,并通过n个输出端口分别输出到相应的天线;移相器用于根据控制信号调整输入信号的相位;上述控制信号可以是modem 20发送的控制信号。When the TX channel connected by the multi-way switch corresponds to n antennas, the multi-way switch is used to control the above-mentioned TX channel to be connected to the above-mentioned n antennas at the same time, or to be connected to a single antenna among the above-mentioned n antennas; Divide the input signal into n signals with equal power, and output them to corresponding antennas through n output ports; the phase shifter is used to adjust the phase of the input signal according to the control signal; the above control signal can be the control signal sent by modem 20.
多路开关0有三个输出端口,即a输出端口、b输出端口和c输出端口。a输出端口连接滤波器0的第一端,滤波器0的第二端连接天线0;c输出端口连接滤波器1的第一端,滤波器1的第二端连接天线1;b输出端口连接功分器1的第一端,功分器1的第二端连接滤波器0的第一端,功分器1的第三端连接移相器0的第一端,移相器0的第二端连接滤波器1的第一端。功分器0用于将输入信号分成两路功率相等的信号,并分别通过第二端和第三端输出到天线0和天线1;移相器0用于调整输入信号的相位,并输出到天线1。The multi-way switch 0 has three output ports, that is, an output port, a b output port, and a c output port. a output port is connected to the first end of filter 0, and the second end of filter 0 is connected to antenna 0; c output port is connected to the first end of filter 1, and the second end of filter 1 is connected to antenna 1; b output port is connected to The first end of power divider 1, the second end of power divider 1 is connected to the first end of filter 0, the third end of power divider 1 is connected to the first end of phase shifter 0, the second end of phase shifter 0 The two terminals are connected to the first terminal of the filter 1 . Power divider 0 is used to divide the input signal into two signals with equal power, and output to antenna 0 and antenna 1 through the second terminal and the third terminal respectively; phase shifter 0 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal, and output to Antenna 1.
综上可知,TX0通道对应天线0和天线1,多路开关0切换至a输出端口时,可以实现TX0通道对应的天线0的选择和信号发送;多路开关0切换至c输出端口时,可以实现TX0通道对应的天线1的选择和信号发送;多路开关0切换至b输出端口时,可以实现TX0通道对应的两根天线的并发,以及天线1对应的模拟信号的移相,进而实现了TX0通道的上行ABF。In summary, the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 and antenna 1. When the multi-way switch 0 is switched to the a output port, the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 0 corresponding to the TX0 channel can be realized; when the multi-way switch 0 is switched to the c output port, it can be Realize the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 1 corresponding to the TX0 channel; when the multi-way switch 0 is switched to the b output port, the concurrency of the two antennas corresponding to the TX0 channel and the phase shift of the analog signal corresponding to the antenna 1 can be realized, thereby realizing Uplink ABF of TX0 channel.
多路开关1也有三个输出端口,即a输出端口、b输出端口和c输出端口。a输出端口连接滤波器2的第一端,滤波器2的第二端连接天线2;c输出端口连接滤波器3的第一端,滤波器3的第二端连接天线3;b输出端口连接功分器1的第一端,功分器1的第二端连接滤波器2的第一端,功分器1的第三端连接移相器1的第一端,移相器1的第二端连接滤波器3的第一端。功分器1用于将输入信号分成两路功率相等的信号,并分别通过第二端和第三端输出到天线2和天线3;移相器1用于调整输入信号的相位,并输出到天线3。The multi-way switch 1 also has three output ports, namely an output port, an output port b, and an output port c. a The output port is connected to the first end of the filter 2, and the second end of the filter 2 is connected to the antenna 2; c The output port is connected to the first end of the filter 3, and the second end of the filter 3 is connected to the antenna 3; b The output port is connected to The first end of the power divider 1, the second end of the power divider 1 is connected to the first end of the filter 2, the third end of the power divider 1 is connected to the first end of the phase shifter 1, the second end of the phase shifter 1 The two terminals are connected to the first terminal of the filter 3 . The power divider 1 is used to divide the input signal into two signals with equal power, and output to the antenna 2 and the antenna 3 through the second end and the third end respectively; the phase shifter 1 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal, and output to the Antenna3.
综上可知,TX1通道对应天线2和天线3,多路开关1切换至a输出端口时,可以实现TX1通道对应的天线2的选择和信号发送;多路开关1切换至c输出端口时,可以实现TX1通道对应的天线3的选择和信号发送;多路开关1切换至b输出端口时,可以实现TX1通道 对应的两根天线的并发,以及天线3对应的模拟信号的移相,以实现TX1通道的上行ABF。In summary, the TX1 channel corresponds to antenna 2 and antenna 3. When the multi-way switch 1 is switched to the a output port, the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 2 corresponding to the TX1 channel can be realized; when the multi-way switch 1 is switched to the c output port, it can Realize the selection and signal transmission of the antenna 3 corresponding to the TX1 channel; when the multi-way switch 1 is switched to the b output port, the concurrency of the two antennas corresponding to the TX1 channel and the phase shift of the analog signal corresponding to the antenna 3 can be realized to realize the TX1 Uplink ABF of the channel.
发送框架2send frame 2
示例性的,以终端200配置1个TX通道(即TX0)和4根天线(即天线0至天线3)为例,图5B示出了本申请实施例涉及的终端200的另一种发送框架的结构示意图。为便于描述,后续简称为发送框架2。如图5B所示,该发送框架包括modem 30、RFIC31以及RFFE32。其中:Exemplarily, taking terminal 200 configured with one TX channel (ie TX0) and 4 antennas (ie antenna 0 to antenna 3) as an example, FIG. 5B shows another transmission framework of terminal 200 involved in the embodiment of the present application Schematic diagram of the structure. For ease of description, it will be referred to as sending frame 2 for short. As shown in FIG. 5B, the sending frame includes modem 30, RFIC31 and RFFE32. in:
发送框架2仅配置一个TX通道,不能实现DBF。RFFE 32包括功率放大器321和AS/ABF模块322。AS/ABF模块322包括多路开关2、功分器2、移相器2、移相器3、移相器4、滤波器4、滤波器5、滤波器6和滤波器7。 Transmission frame 2 only configures one TX channel and cannot implement DBF. The RFFE 32 includes a power amplifier 321 and an AS/ABF module 322. The AS/ABF module 322 includes a multiplexer 2 , a power divider 2 , a phase shifter 2 , a phase shifter 3 , a phase shifter 4 , a filter 4 , a filter 5 , a filter 6 and a filter 7 .
多路开关0有五个输出端口,即a输出端口、b输出端口、c输出端口、d输出端口和e输出端口。b输出端口连接滤波器4的第一端,滤波器4的第二端连接天线0;c输出端口连接滤波器5的第一端,滤波器5的第二端连接天线1;d输出端口连接滤波器6的第一端,滤波器6的第二端连接天线2;e输出端口连接滤波器7的第一端,滤波器7的第二端连接天线3。a输出端口连接功分器2的第一端;功分器2的第二端连接滤波器4的第一端;功分器2的第三端连接移相器2的第一端,移相器2的第二端连接滤波器5的第一端;功分器2的第四端连接移相器3的第一端,移相器3的第二端连接滤波器6的第一端;功分器2的第五端连接移相器4的第一端,移相器4的第二端连接滤波器7的第一端。功分器2用于将输入信号分成四路功率相等的信号,并通过第二端至第五端分别输出到天线0至天线3;移相器2用于调整输入信号的相位,并输出到天线1;移相器3用于调整输入信号的相位,并输出到天线2;移相器4用于调整输入信号的相位,并输出到天线3。The multi-way switch 0 has five output ports, namely, an output port, b output port, c output port, d output port and e output port. The b output port is connected to the first end of the filter 4, the second end of the filter 4 is connected to the antenna 0; the c output port is connected to the first end of the filter 5, and the second end of the filter 5 is connected to the antenna 1; the d output port is connected to The first end of the filter 6 and the second end of the filter 6 are connected to the antenna 2 ; the e output port is connected to the first end of the filter 7 , and the second end of the filter 7 is connected to the antenna 3 . The a output port is connected to the first end of the power divider 2; the second end of the power divider 2 is connected to the first end of the filter 4; the third end of the power divider 2 is connected to the first end of the phase shifter 2, and the phase shift The second end of the device 2 is connected to the first end of the filter 5; the fourth end of the power divider 2 is connected to the first end of the phase shifter 3, and the second end of the phase shifter 3 is connected to the first end of the filter 6; The fifth terminal of the power divider 2 is connected to the first terminal of the phase shifter 4 , and the second terminal of the phase shifter 4 is connected to the first terminal of the filter 7 . The power divider 2 is used to divide the input signal into four signals with equal power, and output to the antenna 0 to the antenna 3 respectively through the second terminal to the fifth terminal; the phase shifter 2 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal, and output to the Antenna 1; phase shifter 3 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal and output to antenna 2; phase shifter 4 is used to adjust the phase of the input signal and output to antenna 3.
综上可知,TX0通道对应天线0至天线4,多路开关2切换至b输出端口(或c输出端口、d输出端口、e输出端口)时,可以实现TX0通道对应的单天线的选择和信号发送;多路开关2切换至a输出端口时,可以实现TX0通道对应的四根天线的并发,以及天线2至天线4对应的模拟信号的移相,进而实现了TX0通道的上行ABF。In summary, the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 to antenna 4, and when the multi-way switch 2 is switched to the b output port (or c output port, d output port, e output port), the selection and signal of the single antenna corresponding to the TX0 channel can be realized. Sending; when the multi-way switch 2 is switched to the a output port, the concurrency of the four antennas corresponding to the TX0 channel and the phase shifting of the analog signals corresponding to the antenna 2 to the antenna 4 can be realized, thereby realizing the uplink ABF of the TX0 channel.
发送框架3send frame 3
示例性的,以终端200配置1个TX通道(即TX0和TX1)和2根天线(即天线0和天线1)为例,图5C示出了本申请实施例涉及的终端200的另一种发送框架的结构示意图。为便于描述,后续简称为发送框架3,如图5C所示,该发送框架包括modem 40、RFIC 41以及RFFE 42。其中:Exemplarily, taking terminal 200 configured with one TX channel (that is, TX0 and TX1) and two antennas (that is, antenna 0 and antenna 1) as an example, FIG. 5C shows another type of terminal 200 involved in the embodiment of the present application. Schematic diagram of the sending framework. For ease of description, it will be referred to as the sending frame 3 hereinafter. As shown in FIG. 5C, the sending frame includes a modem 40, RFIC 41, and RFFE 42. in:
发送框架3仅配置一个TX通道,不能实现DBF。RFFE 42包括功率放大器421和AS/ABF模块422。参见图5A和图5C,AS/ABF模块422包括AS/ABF模块223中TX0通道对应的AS/ABF的硬件结构,具体的,可以参考AS/ABF模块223的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Transmission frame 3 only configures one TX channel and cannot implement DBF. The RFFE 42 includes a power amplifier 421 and an AS/ABF module 422. 5A and 5C, the AS/ABF module 422 includes the AS/ABF hardware structure corresponding to the TX0 channel in the AS/ABF module 223. For details, refer to the relevant description of the AS/ABF module 223, which will not be repeated here.
参考图5A至图5C,多天线并发时,终端不调整第一根天线的模拟信号的相位(即相位调整量为0),并以第一根天线的模拟信号的相位为参考,调整其他天线的模拟信号的相位,从而实现上行ABF。多TX通道并发时,终端不调整第一个TX通道的数字信号的相位(即相位调整量为0),并以第一个TX通道的数字信号的相位为参考,调整其他TX通道的数字信号的相位,从而实现上行DBF。不限于上述相位调整方式,多天线并发时,终端可以通过调整所有天线的模拟信号的相位,来实现上行ABF。多TX通道并发时,终端也可以通过调整所有TX通道的数字信号的相位来实现上行DBF,本申请实施例均不做具体限定。Referring to Figure 5A to Figure 5C, when multiple antennas are concurrent, the terminal does not adjust the phase of the analog signal of the first antenna (that is, the phase adjustment amount is 0), and uses the phase of the analog signal of the first antenna as a reference to adjust the phase of other antennas The phase of the analog signal, so as to realize the uplink ABF. When multiple TX channels are concurrent, the terminal does not adjust the phase of the digital signal of the first TX channel (that is, the phase adjustment amount is 0), and uses the phase of the digital signal of the first TX channel as a reference to adjust the digital signals of other TX channels phase, so as to realize the uplink DBF. The phase adjustment method is not limited to the above. When multiple antennas are concurrent, the terminal can adjust the phases of the analog signals of all antennas to implement uplink ABF. When multiple TX channels are concurrent, the terminal may also adjust the phases of digital signals of all TX channels to implement uplink DBF, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
此外,上述3种发送框架是本申请实施例提供的示例性的发送框架,实际应用中,上述 发送框架还可以包括更多或更少的硬件。本申请实施例对TX通道的数量以及每个TX通道对应的天线数量不做具体限定。此外,本申请实施例对RX通道的数量、结构以及每个RX通道对应的天线数量也均不作具体限定。In addition, the above three sending frameworks are exemplary sending frameworks provided by the embodiments of this application, and in practical applications, the above sending frameworks may also include more or less hardware. The embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of TX channels and the number of antennas corresponding to each TX channel. In addition, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number and structure of the RX channels and the number of antennas corresponding to each RX channel.
结合前述发送框架,下面对本申请实施例提供涉及的HBF权值码本集进行介绍。In combination with the aforementioned sending framework, the following introduces the HBF weight codebook set involved in the embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中终端200的上行发送信号可以进行ABF加权和/或DBF加权,最终发送的上行波束相对于初始的基带信号的综合加权值简称为HBF权值。可以理解,本申请实施例中,若终端200仅进行了上行ABF未进行DBF,则终端200发送上行波束的HBF权值指示的移相值等于ABF权值指示的模拟移相值。若终端200仅进行了上行DBF未进行ABF,则终端200发送上行波束的HBF权值指示的移相值等于DBF权值指示的数字移相值。若终端200未进行上行DBF和上行ABF,则该上行波束的HBF移相值等于0。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, the uplink transmission signal of the terminal 200 may be weighted by ABF and/or DBF, and the comprehensive weight value of the final transmitted uplink beam relative to the initial baseband signal is referred to as HBF weight for short. It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, if the terminal 200 only performs uplink ABF but not DBF, the phase shift value indicated by the HBF weight value of the uplink beam sent by the terminal 200 is equal to the analog phase shift value indicated by the ABF weight value. If the terminal 200 only performs uplink DBF but does not perform ABF, the phase shift value indicated by the HBF weight value of the uplink beam sent by the terminal 200 is equal to the digital phase shift value indicated by the DBF weight value. If the terminal 200 does not perform uplink DBF and uplink ABF, the HBF phase shift value of the uplink beam is equal to 0.
其中,模拟移相值与ABF的移相精度相关联,数字移相值与DBF的移相精度相关联。Among them, the analog phase shift value is associated with the phase shift accuracy of the ABF, and the digital phase shift value is associated with the phase shift accuracy of the DBF.
在一些实施例中,本申请实施例可以定义M类ABF移相档位,上述M类移相档位中的第m类移相档位
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000004
包含K个移相档位。还可以定义N类DBF移相档位,上述N类移相档位中的第n类移相档位
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000006
包含L个移相档位。其中,M和L为正整数。可选的,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000007
的ABF移相精度均360/K°。可选的,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000008
的DBF移相精度均360/L°。终端200可以支持哪一类ABF移相档位和/或哪一类DBF移相档位,受终端200自身的硬件性能和软件性能影响。可以理解,移相精度越高,对硬件性能和软件性能要求越高,表征权值所需的信息比特量也越多。
In some embodiments, the embodiment of the present application can define M-type ABF phase-shifting gears, and the m-th type of phase-shifting gears in the above-mentioned M-type phase-shifting gears
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000004
Contains K phase shifting gears. It is also possible to define N-type DBF phase-shifting gears, the nth type of phase-shifting gears in the above-mentioned N-type phase-shifting gears
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000006
Contains L phase shifting gears. Wherein, M and L are positive integers. optional,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000007
The ABF phase shift accuracy is 360/K°. optional,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000008
The DBF phase shift accuracy is 360/L°. Which type of ABF phase-shifting gear and/or which type of DBF phase-shifting gear the terminal 200 can support is affected by the hardware performance and software performance of the terminal 200 itself. It can be understood that the higher the precision of phase shifting, the higher the requirements for hardware performance and software performance, and the more information bits are required to represent the weight.
可选的,ABF和DBF的移相精度均为90°,ABF的模拟移相值和DBF的数字移相值均有{0°,90°,180°,-90°}四个移相档位。Optionally, the phase shift accuracy of both ABF and DBF is 90°, the analog phase shift value of ABF and the digital phase shift value of DBF both have four phase shift positions of {0°, 90°, 180°, -90°} bit.
可选的,ABF和DBF的移相精度均为45°,模拟移相值和数字移相值均有{0°,45°,90°,135°,180°,-135°,-90°,-45°}这8个移相档位。Optionally, the phase shift accuracy of ABF and DBF is 45°, and the analog phase shift value and digital phase shift value are {0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, -135°, -90° ,-45°} These 8 phase shift positions.
本申请实施例中,网络设备100可以根据终端200的ABF移相档位、和DBF移相档位、终端200的TX通道配置和天线配置,获取适用于该终端200的HBF权值码本集。在一些实施例中,终端200配置了Y根天线,上述HBF权值码本集合中的每个码字的长度为Y,上述每个码字的第i个码元表征上述Y根天线中的第i根天线的HBF权值。In the embodiment of this application, the network device 100 can obtain the HBF weight codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 according to the ABF phase shifting gear and DBF phase shifting gear of the terminal 200, the TX channel configuration and the antenna configuration of the terminal 200 . In some embodiments, the terminal 200 is configured with Y antennas, the length of each codeword in the aforementioned HBF weight codebook set is Y, and the i-th symbol of each of the aforementioned codewords represents the The HBF weight of the i-th antenna.
可选的,一根天线的HBF权值为0,表征该天线未被选择,一根天线的HBF权值不为0,表征该天线被选择。一个TX通道对应的天线的HBF权值均等于0,表征该TX通道未被选择;一个TX通道对应的至少一根天线的HBF权值不等于0时,表征该TX通道被选择。一个TX通道对应的天线的HBF权值只有一个不等于0时,表征该TX通道使用单天线发送方式,不进行ABF;一个TX通道对应的至少两根天线的HBF权值不等于0时,表征该TX通道使用ABF发送方式,且基于上述至少两根天线的HBF权值可以确定上述至少两根天线的模拟移相值。仅有一个TX通道选择时,表征终端使用单通道发送方式,不进行DBF;至少两个TX通道选择时,表征该TX通道使用DBF发送方式,且基于上述至少两个TX通道的天线的HBF权值可以确定上述至少两个TX通道的数字移相值。可以理解,天线被选择指可以通过该天线发送数据,TX通道被选择指可以通过该TX通道发送数据。Optionally, the HBF weight of an antenna is 0, indicating that the antenna is not selected, and the HBF weight of an antenna is not 0, indicating that the antenna is selected. The HBF weights of the antennas corresponding to a TX channel are all equal to 0, indicating that the TX channel is not selected; when the HBF weights of at least one antenna corresponding to a TX channel are not equal to 0, it indicates that the TX channel is selected. When only one HBF weight of the antenna corresponding to a TX channel is not equal to 0, it indicates that the TX channel uses a single-antenna transmission mode and does not perform ABF; when the HBF weights of at least two antennas corresponding to a TX channel are not equal to 0, it indicates that The TX channel uses an ABF transmission manner, and the analog phase shift values of the at least two antennas can be determined based on the HBF weights of the at least two antennas. When only one TX channel is selected, it indicates that the terminal uses a single-channel transmission method without DBF; when at least two TX channels are selected, it indicates that the TX channel uses the DBF transmission method, and the HBF weight of the antenna based on the above-mentioned at least two TX channels The value can determine the digital phase shift value of the above-mentioned at least two TX channels. It can be understood that the selected antenna means that data can be sent through the antenna, and the selected TX channel means that data can be sent through the TX channel.
本申请实施例,可以将3GPP协议定义的TPMI码本用作终端200的HBF码本集。目前,TPMI码本包括4端口的上行相干码本和2端口的上行相干码本,4端口的上行相干码本对应的码本集1包括27个码字,具体如表1所示;2端口的上行相干码本对应的码本集2包括 6个码字,具体如表2所示。In this embodiment of the present application, the TPMI codebook defined by the 3GPP protocol may be used as the HBF codebook set of the terminal 200 . Currently, the TPMI codebook includes a 4-port uplink coherent codebook and a 2-port uplink coherent codebook, and the codebook set 1 corresponding to the 4-port uplink coherent codebook includes 27 codewords, as shown in Table 1; The codebook set 2 corresponding to the uplink coherent codebook includes 6 codewords, as shown in Table 2 for details.
表1.码本集1Table 1. Codebook Set 1
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000009
表2.码本集2Table 2. Codebook Set 2
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000010
下面以码本集1和码本集2为例,对三种配置的终端的HBF权值码本集进行举例说明。The codebook set 1 and the codebook set 2 are taken as examples below to illustrate the HBF weight codebook sets of terminals with three configurations.
第一种配置:2T/4配置的终端The first configuration: terminal with 2T/4 configuration
本申请实施例中,2T/4配置的终端的上行发送方式包括:单天线发送;2个TX通道进行DBF发送且两个TX通道分别选择一根天线;2个TX通道进行DBF发送且两个TX通道均选择两根天线均进行ABF发送。In the embodiment of this application, the uplink transmission mode of the terminal configured with 2T/4 includes: single antenna transmission; two TX channels for DBF transmission and two TX channels respectively select one antenna; two TX channels for DBF transmission and two The TX channel selects two antennas for ABF transmission.
在一些实施例中,将码本集1作为HBF权值码本集,该HBF权值码本集适用于ABF和DBF的移相精度均为90°的2T/4配置的终端。参见表1可知,码本集1中的码字不支持3根天线的发送,即不支持如下发送方式:2个TX通道中的一个TX通道进行单天线发送,另以个TX通道进行两天线的ABF发送。In some embodiments, the codebook set 1 is used as the HBF weight codebook set, and the HBF weight codebook set is applicable to a terminal in a 2T/4 configuration with both ABF and DBF phase shift precisions being 90°. Referring to Table 1, it can be seen that the codewords in codebook set 1 do not support the transmission of three antennas, that is, the following transmission methods are not supported: one of the two TX channels performs single-antenna transmission, and the other uses two TX channels for two-antenna transmission. ABF sent.
示例性的,2T/4配置的终端200的发送框架可以参考前述发送框架1,即终端200配置了TX0通道和TX1通道,TX0通道对应天线0和天线1,TX1通道对应天线2和天线3,码本集1中的一个码字的四个码元分别为天线0至天线3的HBF权值。可以理解,TX0通道对应码字中的前两个码元,TX1通道对应码字中的后两个码元。示例性的,以码本集1中索引为10的码字W 10为例,该码字中的各码元与天线、TX通道的关系如图6所示。具体的,码本集1的28个码字的索引分别为0至27,其中: Exemplarily, the transmission frame of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 can refer to the foregoing transmission frame 1, that is, the terminal 200 is configured with a TX0 channel and a TX1 channel, the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 and antenna 1, and the TX1 channel corresponds to antenna 2 and antenna 3, The four symbols of a codeword in codebook set 1 are the HBF weights of antenna 0 to antenna 3 respectively. It can be understood that the TX0 channel corresponds to the first two symbols in the codeword, and the TX1 channel corresponds to the last two symbols in the codeword. Exemplarily, taking the codeword W 10 whose index is 10 in the codebook set 1 as an example, the relationship between each symbol in the codeword and the antenna and TX channel is shown in FIG. 6 . Specifically, the indices of the 28 codewords in codebook set 1 are 0 to 27 respectively, where:
索引为0至3的四个码字中仅有一个码元不等于0,这四个码字分别指示了天线0、天线 1、天线2、天线3的单天线发送方式。Only one symbol among the four codewords with indexes 0 to 3 is not equal to 0, and these four codewords respectively indicate the single-antenna transmission modes of antenna 0, antenna 1, antenna 2, and antenna 3.
索引为4至7的四个码字的第一个码元和第三个码元不等于0,第二个码元和第四个码元均等于零,这指示了2个TX通道可以进行DBF发送。其中,上述第一个码元指示了TX0通道对应的数字移相值为0,上述第三个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了TX1通道对应的数字移相值。由表1可知,这四个码字指示的TX1通道对应的数字移相值分别为0°、-180°、90°和-90°。The first and third symbols of the four codewords with indexes 4 to 7 are not equal to 0, and the second and fourth symbols are both equal to zero, which indicates that 2 TX channels can perform DBF send. Wherein, the first symbol indicates that the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX0 channel is 0, and the phase difference between the third symbol and the first symbol indicates the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX1 channel. It can be seen from Table 1 that the digital phase shift values corresponding to the TX1 channel indicated by these four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
索引为8至11的四个码字的第二个码元和第四个码元不等于0,第一个码元和第三个码元均等于零,这指示了2个TX通道可以进行DBF发送。其中,上述第二个码元指示了TX0通道对应的数字移相值均为0,上述第四个码元与第二个码元的相位差指示了TX1通道对应的数字移相值;由表1可知,这四个码字指示的TX1通道对应的数字移相值分别为0°、-180°、90°和-90°。The second and fourth symbols of the four codewords with indexes 8 to 11 are not equal to 0, and the first and third symbols are both equal to zero, which indicates that 2 TX channels can perform DBF send. Wherein, the above-mentioned second symbol indicates that the digital phase-shift value corresponding to the TX0 channel is 0, and the phase difference between the above-mentioned fourth symbol and the second symbol indicates the corresponding digital phase-shift value of the TX1 channel; by table 1, it can be seen that the digital phase shift values corresponding to the TX1 channel indicated by these four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
索引为12至27的16码字的四个码元均不等于0,这指示了2个TX通道进行DBF发送、TX0通道可以通过天线0和天线1进行ABF发送、TX1通道通过天线2和天线3进行ABF发送。其中,上述第一个码元指示了TX0通道对应的数字移相值均为0,第三个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了TX1通道对应的数字移相值;天线0和天线2对应的模拟移相值均为0,第二个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了天线1对应的模拟移相值,第四个码元与第三个码元的相位差指示了天线3对应的模拟移相值。The four symbols of the 16 codewords with indexes 12 to 27 are not equal to 0, which indicates that 2 TX channels are used for DBF transmission, TX0 channel can perform ABF transmission through antenna 0 and antenna 1, and TX1 channel can be transmitted through antenna 2 and antenna 3 Perform ABF transmission. Among them, the first symbol above indicates that the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX0 channel is 0, and the phase difference between the third symbol and the first symbol indicates the digital phase shift value corresponding to the TX1 channel; antenna 0 and The analog phase shift values corresponding to antenna 2 are all 0, the phase difference between the second symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1, and the phase difference between the fourth symbol and the third symbol The difference indicates the corresponding analog phase shift value for antenna 3.
第二种配置:1T/4配置的终端The second configuration: terminal with 1T/4 configuration
本申请实施例中,若1T/4配置的终端的发送框架参考前述发送框架2,则1T/4配置的终端的上行发送方式包括:单天线发送;两根天线进行ABF发送;三根天线进行ABF发送;四根天线进行ABF发送。In the embodiment of this application, if the transmission frame of the terminal configured with 1T/4 refers to the aforementioned transmission frame 2, the uplink transmission mode of the terminal configured with 1T/4 includes: single antenna transmission; two antennas for ABF transmission; three antennas for ABF Sending; four antennas for ABF sending.
在一些实施例中,将码本集1作为HBF权值码本集,该HBF权值码本集适用于ABF移相精度为90°的1T/4配置的终端。In some embodiments, the codebook set 1 is used as the HBF weight codebook set, and the HBF weight codebook set is applicable to a 1T/4 configured terminal whose ABF phase shift accuracy is 90°.
示例性的,1T/4配置的终端的发送框架可以参前述发送框架2,即终端配置了TX0通道,TX0通道对应天线0至天线3。码本集1中的一个码字的四个码元分别为天线0至天线3的HBF权值。参见表1可知,码本集1中的码字不支持3天线的ABF发送。参见发送框架2可知,发送框架2不支持2根和3根天线的选择,即具备发送框架2的终端不支持两根天线进行ABF发送和三根天线进行ABF发送。可选的,若将图5B中多路开关2替换为支持选择2根天线和3根天线的多路开关,则1T/4配置的终端也能支持2根天线的ABF发送和3根天线的ABF发送。Exemplarily, the transmission frame of the terminal configured in 1T/4 can refer to the foregoing transmission frame 2, that is, the terminal is configured with a TX0 channel, and the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 to antenna 3. The four symbols of a codeword in codebook set 1 are the HBF weights of antenna 0 to antenna 3 respectively. Referring to Table 1, it can be known that codewords in codebook set 1 do not support ABF transmission with 3 antennas. Referring to the transmission frame 2, it can be seen that the transmission frame 2 does not support the selection of 2 and 3 antennas, that is, the terminal with the transmission frame 2 does not support two antennas for ABF transmission and three antennas for ABF transmission. Optionally, if the multi-way switch 2 in Figure 5B is replaced with a multi-way switch that supports the selection of 2 antennas and 3 antennas, the terminal configured with 1T/4 can also support ABF transmission of 2 antennas and ABF transmission of 3 antennas. ABF sent.
码本集1的28个码字的索引分别为0至27,针对上述1T/4配置的终端,其中:The indices of the 28 codewords in codebook set 1 are 0 to 27, respectively, for the above-mentioned 1T/4 configured terminal, where:
索引为0至4的四个码字中仅有一个码元不等于0,这四个码字分别指示了天线0、天线1、天线2、天线3的单天线发送方式。Only one symbol among the four codewords with indexes 0 to 4 is not equal to 0, and these four codewords respectively indicate the single-antenna transmission modes of antenna 0, antenna 1, antenna 2, and antenna 3.
索引为4至7的四个码字的第一个码元和第三个码元不等于0,第二个码元和第四个码元均等于零,这指示了TX0通道可以通过天线0和天线2进行ABF发送。其中,上述第一个码元指示了天线0对应的模拟移相值均为0,上述第三个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了天线2对应的模拟移相值;由表1可知,上述四个码字指示了天线2对应的模拟移相值分别为0°、-180°、90°和-90°。The first symbol and the third symbol of the four codewords with indexes 4 to 7 are not equal to 0, and the second symbol and the fourth symbol are both equal to zero, which indicates that the TX0 channel can pass antenna 0 and Antenna 2 performs ABF transmission. Wherein, the above-mentioned first symbol indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 0 is 0, and the phase difference between the above-mentioned third symbol and the first symbol indicates the corresponding analog phase shift value of antenna 2; 1, it can be seen that the above four codewords indicate that the analog phase shift values corresponding to antenna 2 are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
索引为8至11的码字的第二个码元和第四个码元不等于0,第一个码元和第三个码元均等于零,这指示了TX0通道可以通过天线1和天线3进行ABF发送。其中,上述第二个码 元指示了天线1对应的模拟移相值均为0,上述第四个码元与第二个码元的相位差指示了天线3对应的模拟移相值;由表1可知,上述四个码字指示的天线3对应的模拟移相值分别为0°、-180°、90°和-90°。The second and fourth symbols of the codewords with indexes 8 to 11 are not equal to 0, and the first and third symbols are both equal to zero, which indicates that the TX0 channel can pass through antenna 1 and antenna 3 Perform ABF transmission. Wherein, the above-mentioned second symbol indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1 is 0, and the phase difference between the above-mentioned fourth symbol and the second symbol indicates the corresponding analog phase shift value of antenna 3; 1, it can be seen that the analog phase shift values corresponding to the antenna 3 indicated by the above four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90° respectively.
索引为12至27的16个码字的四个码元均不等于0,指示了TX0通道可以通过天线0至天线3进行ABF发送。其中,第一个码元指示了天线1对应的模拟移相值均为0,第二个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了天线1对应的模拟移相值,第三个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了天线2对应的模拟移相值,第四个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了天线3对应的模拟移相值。None of the four symbols of the 16 codewords with indexes 12 to 27 is equal to 0, indicating that the TX0 channel can perform ABF transmission through antenna 0 to antenna 3 . Among them, the first symbol indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1 is 0, the phase difference between the second symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1, and the third code The phase difference between the first symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 2, and the phase difference between the fourth symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 3.
第三种配置:1T/2配置的终端The third configuration: terminal with 1T/2 configuration
本申请实施例中,1T/2配置的终端的上行发送方式包括:单天线发送;两根天线进行ABF发送。In the embodiment of the present application, the uplink transmission mode of the terminal configured in 1T/2 includes: single-antenna transmission; two antennas perform ABF transmission.
在一些实施例中,将码本集2作为HBF权值码本集,该HBF权值码本集适用ABF移相精度为90°的1T/2配置的终端。In some embodiments, the codebook set 2 is used as the HBF weight codebook set, and the HBF weight codebook set is applicable to a 1T/2 configured terminal with an ABF phase shift accuracy of 90°.
示例性的,1T/2配置的终端200的发送框架可以参考前述发送框架3,即终端200配置了TX0通道,TX0通道对应天线0和天线1,码本集2中的一个码字的两个码元分别为天线0和天线1的HBF权值。码本集2共包括6个码字,6个码字的索引分别为0至5,其中:Exemplarily, the transmission frame of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/2 can refer to the aforementioned transmission frame 3, that is, the terminal 200 is configured with a TX0 channel, and the TX0 channel corresponds to antenna 0 and antenna 1, and two codewords in a codebook set 2 The symbols are the HBF weights of antenna 0 and antenna 1 respectively. The codebook set 2 includes 6 codewords in total, and the indexes of the 6 codewords are 0 to 5 respectively, where:
索引为0的码字中仅有第一个码元不等于0,指示了天线0的单天线发送方式,类似的,索引为1的码字指示了天线1的单天线发送方式。Only the first symbol in the codeword with index 0 is not equal to 0, which indicates the single-antenna transmission mode of antenna 0. Similarly, the codeword with index 1 indicates the single-antenna transmission mode of antenna 1.
索引为2至5的四码字的两个码元均不等于零,这指示了TX0通道可以通过天线0和天线1进行ABF发送。其中,两个码元中的第一个码元指示了天线0对应的模拟移相值为0°,第二个码元与第一个码元的相位差指示了天线1对应的模拟移相值。由表2可知,上述四个码字指示的天线1对应的模拟移相值分比为0°、-180°、90°和-90°。Neither of the two symbols of the four codewords with indexes 2 to 5 is equal to zero, which indicates that the TX0 channel can perform ABF transmission through antenna 0 and antenna 1 . Among them, the first symbol of the two symbols indicates that the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 0 is 0°, and the phase difference between the second symbol and the first symbol indicates the analog phase shift value corresponding to antenna 1 value. It can be seen from Table 2 that the analog phase shift value division ratios corresponding to antenna 1 indicated by the above four codewords are 0°, -180°, 90° and -90°.
需要说明的是,鉴于不同TX通道支持的最大发送功率可能不同,将码本集1和码本集2作为HBF权值码本集使用时,需要基于各TX通道支持的最大发送功率对码本集1和码本集2中的码字进行功率修正。具体的,将在后续实施例中进行详细介绍,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that since the maximum transmit power supported by different TX channels may be different, when using codebook set 1 and codebook set 2 as the HBF weight codebook set, it is necessary to set the codebook based on the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel. Codewords in set 1 and codebook set 2 are power corrected. Specifically, it will be introduced in detail in subsequent embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,网络设备100基于终端200的每根天线的上行信道估计,可以从适用于终端200的HBF权值码本集中确定出最优的上行发送方式对应的码字;终端200基于该码字可以确定后续上行发送时是否进行DBF、进行DBF时的数字移相值、是否进行ABF以及进行ABF时的模拟移相值。In some embodiments, based on the uplink channel estimation of each antenna of the terminal 200, the network device 100 can determine the codeword corresponding to the optimal uplink transmission mode from the HBF weight codebook set applicable to the terminal 200; the terminal 200 is based on The codeword can determine whether to perform DBF, the digital phase shift value when performing DBF, whether to perform ABF, and the analog phase shift value when performing ABF during subsequent uplink transmission.
可以理解,使用3GPP协议已定义的TPMI码本,无需额外增加码本,在当前的实际应用场景中该码本更易于实现。It can be understood that using the TPMI codebook defined by the 3GPP protocol does not require additional codebooks, and the codebooks are easier to implement in current practical application scenarios.
结合前述技术概念、发送框架和HBF权值码本集,下面对本申请实施例提供的波束成形方法的方法流程进行介绍。Combining the foregoing technical concept, transmission framework, and HBF weight codebook set, the method flow of the beamforming method provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图7A示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的波束成形方法的流程图,该波束成形方法应用于终端200和网络设备100,该波束成形方法包括但不限于步骤S101至S113,其中:FIG. 7A exemplarily shows a flowchart of a beamforming method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The beamforming method is applied to the terminal 200 and the network device 100. The beamforming method includes but is not limited to steps S101 to S113, wherein:
S101、终端200向网络设备100发送第一消息,网络设备100接收终端200发送的第一消息,第一消息用于上报终端200的TX通道和天线配置。S101. The terminal 200 sends a first message to the network device 100. The network device 100 receives the first message sent by the terminal 200. The first message is used to report the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
S102、网络设备100解析第一消息,识别终端200的TX通道和天线配置。S102. The network device 100 parses the first message, and identifies the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
可选的,第一消息为高层信令消息,例如无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC) 层消息。Optionally, the first message is a high-level signaling message, such as a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) layer message.
需要说明的是,不同的终端、不同的频段所支持的TX通道和天线的配置可能不同。本申请实施例中,为了适配不同的终端和频段,终端200需要向网络设备100上报TX通道和天线配置,以便于网络设备100针对不同的配置自适应地确定该配置下的目标发送方式。It should be noted that different terminals and different frequency bands may support different configurations of TX channels and antennas. In the embodiment of the present application, in order to adapt to different terminals and frequency bands, the terminal 200 needs to report the TX channel and antenna configuration to the network device 100, so that the network device 100 can adaptively determine the target transmission mode under the configuration for different configurations.
在一些实施例中,第一消息携带终端200的配置类型,终端200的配置类型用于指示终端200的TX通道和天线配置。In some embodiments, the first message carries the configuration type of the terminal 200, and the configuration type of the terminal 200 is used to indicate the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
可选的,终端200的TX通道和天线的配置类型可以包括如下三种:Optionally, the configuration types of the TX channels and antennas of the terminal 200 may include the following three types:
配置类型0:终端配置2个TX通道、4根天线(即2T/4配置)。Configuration type 0: The terminal is configured with 2 TX channels and 4 antennas (that is, 2T/4 configuration).
配置类型1:终端配置1个TX通道、4根天线(即1T/4配置)。Configuration type 1: The terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 4 antennas (that is, 1T/4 configuration).
配置类型2:终端配置1个TX通道、2根天线(即1T/2配置)。Configuration type 2: The terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 2 antennas (that is, 1T/2 configuration).
目前,配置类型0的终端支持的频段通常为NR TDD频段,配置类型1的终端支持的频段通常为NR TDD频段或FDD中高频段(例如1~3GHz),配置类型2的终端支持的频段通常为FDD低频段(例如频段<1GHz)。Currently, the frequency bands supported by terminals with configuration type 0 are usually NR TDD frequency bands, the frequency bands supported by terminals with configuration type 1 are usually NR TDD frequency bands or FDD medium and high frequency bands (such as 1-3 GHz), and the frequency bands supported by terminals with configuration type 2 are usually For FDD low frequency band (eg frequency band <1GHz).
不限于上述3种配置类型,本申请实施例涉及的终端在其他TX通道和天线配置下,还可以有更多可能的配置类型,此处不作具体限定。Not limited to the above three configuration types, the terminal involved in the embodiment of the present application may have more possible configuration types under other TX channel and antenna configurations, which are not specifically limited here.
可选的,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种TX通道和天线配置的配置类型,终端200通过各配置类型对应的索引(例如0、1、2)表征该配置类型,并通过第一消息的预设字段1中携带终端200的配置类型对应的索引。网络设备100通过解析第一消息,获取配置类型对应的索引,进而可以识别终端200的TX通道和天线配置。Optionally, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the terminal 200 characterizes the configuration type through the index (for example, 0, 1, 2) corresponding to each configuration type, and passes the first message The index corresponding to the configuration type of the terminal 200 is carried in the preset field 1 of . The network device 100 obtains the index corresponding to the configuration type by parsing the first message, and then can identify the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 .
可选的,终端200配置了多个TX通道和多根天线,但仅有部分TX通道和天线支持HBF。终端200上报支持HBF的TX通道和天线,第一消息携带支持HBF的TX通道的索引和天线的索引;或者,支持HBF的TX通道和天线对应指定的配置类型,第一消息携带上述配置类型的索引。Optionally, the terminal 200 is configured with multiple TX channels and multiple antennas, but only some of the TX channels and antennas support HBF. The terminal 200 reports the TX channel and antenna supporting HBF, and the first message carries the index of the TX channel supporting HBF and the index of the antenna; or, the TX channel and antenna supporting HBF correspond to the specified configuration type, and the first message carries the index of the above configuration type index.
S103、终端200向网络设备100发送第二消息,网络设备100接收终端200发送的第二消息,第二消息用于上报终端200的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率。S103, the terminal 200 sends a second message to the network device 100, and the network device 100 receives the second message sent by the terminal 200, and the second message is used to report the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200.
S104、网络设备100解析第二消息,识别终端200的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率。S104. The network device 100 parses the second message, and identifies the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200.
可选的,第二消息为高层信令消息,例如RRC层消息。Optionally, the second message is a high-level signaling message, such as an RRC layer message.
需要说明的是,针对不同的频段,协议允许的最大发送功率可能不同。本申请实施例中,为了适配不同频段,终端200需要向网络设备100上报各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,以便于适配不同的功率放大器的设计以及网络设备100针对不同的功率能力自适应地确定该功率能力下的目标发送方式。It should be noted that, for different frequency bands, the maximum transmission power allowed by the protocol may be different. In the embodiment of this application, in order to adapt to different frequency bands, the terminal 200 needs to report the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel to the network device 100, so as to adapt to different power amplifier designs and the network device 100 to adapt to different power capabilities accurately determine the target transmission mode under the power capability.
在一些实施例中,第二消息携带终端200的功率能力类型,终端200的功率能力类型用于指示终端200的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率。In some embodiments, the second message carries the power capability type of the terminal 200, and the power capability type of the terminal 200 is used to indicate the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200.
针对不同的TX通道配置的终端,可选的功率能力类型是不同的,本申请实施例以配置2个TX通道的终端为例进行说明。终端200配置了2个TX通道,终端200需要向网络设备100上报2个TX通道的功率能力。可选的,针对终端当前的频段,协议允许的最大发送功率为P_max,终端200的功率能力类型包括如下3种:For terminals configured with different TX channels, selectable power capability types are different. In this embodiment of the present application, a terminal configured with two TX channels is taken as an example for illustration. The terminal 200 is configured with two TX channels, and the terminal 200 needs to report the power capability of the two TX channels to the network device 100 . Optionally, for the current frequency band of the terminal, the maximum transmission power allowed by the protocol is P_max, and the power capability types of the terminal 200 include the following three types:
功率能力0,即2个TX通道各自支持的最大发送功率均为P_max。 Power capability 0, that is, the maximum transmit power supported by each of the two TX channels is P_max.
功率能力1,2个TX通道中的一个TX通道支持的最大发送功率为P_max,另一个TX通道支持的最大发送功率为(P_max/2)。 Power capability 1, the maximum transmission power supported by one of the two TX channels is P_max, and the maximum transmission power supported by the other TX channel is (P_max/2).
功率能力2,2个TX通道各自支持的最大发送功率均为(P_max/2)。For power capability 2, the maximum transmit power supported by each of the two TX channels is (P_max/2).
可选的,终端配置了A个TX通道,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种上述A个TX通道的功率能力类型,终端200通过各功率能力类型对应的索引(例如0、1、2)表征上述各种功率能力类型,并在第二消息的预设字段2中携带终端200的功率能力类型对应的索引。网络设备100通过解析第二消息,获取终端200的功率能力类型的索引,进而可以识别终端200的2个TX通道支持的最大发送功率。Optionally, the terminal is configured with A TX channels, and the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the above-mentioned A TX channels, and the terminal 200 uses the index corresponding to each power capability type (for example, 0, 1, 2) Characterize the above various power capability types, and carry an index corresponding to the power capability type of the terminal 200 in the preset field 2 of the second message. The network device 100 obtains the index of the power capability type of the terminal 200 by parsing the second message, and then can identify the maximum transmission power supported by the two TX channels of the terminal 200 .
在一些实施例中,步骤S103和S104是可选的。示例性的,在一种情况下,终端200仅配置了1个TX通道,终端200的发送框架可以参见前述发送框架2或发送框架3。该情况下,终端200无需上报功率能力,网络设备100可以默认终端200的TX通道支持的最大发送功率为上述P_max。在另一种情况下,网络设备100本地存储有终端200的各TX通道的功率能力,或者网络设备100可以通过其他第三方设备间接获取终端200的各TX通道的功率能力。该情况下,终端200无需上报功率能力。在另一种情况下,终端200配置了n个TX通道,且n个TX通道支持的最大发送功率均为上述P_max。该情况下,终端200无需上报功率能力信息,若网络设备100未接收到终端200上报的功率能力,则默认终端200的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率均为上述P_max。In some embodiments, steps S103 and S104 are optional. Exemplarily, in one case, the terminal 200 is configured with only one TX channel, and the sending frame of the terminal 200 may refer to the aforementioned sending frame 2 or sending frame 3 . In this case, the terminal 200 does not need to report the power capability, and the network device 100 may assume that the maximum transmission power supported by the TX channel of the terminal 200 is the above-mentioned P_max. In another case, the network device 100 locally stores the power capability of each TX channel of the terminal 200, or the network device 100 may indirectly acquire the power capability of each TX channel of the terminal 200 through other third-party devices. In this case, the terminal 200 does not need to report the power capability. In another case, the terminal 200 is configured with n TX channels, and the maximum transmit powers supported by the n TX channels are all the above-mentioned P_max. In this case, the terminal 200 does not need to report the power capability information. If the network device 100 does not receive the power capability reported by the terminal 200, the default maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200 is the above P_max.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,终端200和网络设备100可以实现功率能力的交互,即终端200具备功率能力上报的功能,且网络设备100具备功率能力识别的功能。此外,终端200配置的TX通道数量越多,可选的功率能力类型越多,此处不做具体限定。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can realize power capability interaction, that is, the terminal 200 has the function of reporting the power capability, and the network device 100 has the function of identifying the power capability. In addition, the more the number of TX channels configured on the terminal 200, the more optional power capability types, which are not specifically limited here.
S105、终端200向网络设备100发送第三消息,网络设备100接收终端200发送的第三消息,第三消息用于指示终端200支持的移相档位,移相档位包括ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。S105. The terminal 200 sends a third message to the network device 100, and the network device 100 receives the third message sent by the terminal 200. The third message is used to indicate the phase-shifting gears supported by the terminal 200, and the phase-shifting gears include ABF phase-shifting gears and/or DBF phase shift gears.
S106、网络设备100解析第三消息,识别终端200支持的ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。S106. The network device 100 parses the third message, and identifies the ABF phase-shifting gear and/or the DBF phase-shifting gear supported by the terminal 200.
可选的,第二消息为高层信令消息,例如RRC层消息。Optionally, the second message is a high-level signaling message, such as an RRC layer message.
需要说明的是,具备不同的硬件性能和软件性能的终端,支持的ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位可能不同。本申请实施例中,为了适配不同的硬件性能和软件性能,终端200需要向网络设备100上报ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位,以便于网络设备100针对不同的移相档位自适应地确定该移相档位下的目标发送方式。It should be noted that terminals with different hardware performance and software performance may support different ABF phase shifting gears and/or DBF phase shifting gears. In the embodiment of the present application, in order to adapt to different hardware performance and software performance, the terminal 200 needs to report the ABF phase-shifting gear and/or DBF phase-shifting gear to the network device 100, so that the network device 100 can target different phase-shifting gears The bit adaptively determines the target transmission mode under the phase shift gear.
在一些实施例中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位的移相精度,终端200通过第三消息的预设字段3可以携带ABF移相精度和/或DBF移相精度,ABF移相精度用于指示ABF移相档位,DBF移相精度用于指示DBF移相档位。示例性的,参考前述实施例有关移相档位的描述,ABF(或DBF)移相精度为90°时,ABF(或DBF)移相档位包括{0°,90°,180°,-90°};ABF(或DBF)移相精度为45°时,ABF(或DBF)移相档位包括{0°,45°,90°,135°,180°,-135°,-90°,-45°}。In some embodiments, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase shifting precisions of the phase shifting gears, and the terminal 200 can carry the ABF phase shifting precision and/or the DBF phase shifting precision through the preset field 3 of the third message, The ABF phase shift accuracy is used to indicate the ABF phase shift gear, and the DBF phase shift accuracy is used to indicate the DBF phase shift gear. Exemplarily, referring to the description of the phase shifting gears in the foregoing embodiments, when the ABF (or DBF) phase shifting accuracy is 90°, the ABF (or DBF) phase shifting gears include {0°, 90°, 180°,- 90°}; when the ABF (or DBF) phase shift accuracy is 45°, the ABF (or DBF) phase shift gears include {0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, -135°, -90° ,-45°}.
在一些实施例中,终端和网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位类型,所述第三消息携带终端的移相档位类型的索引。In some embodiments, the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase shifting gear types, and the third message carries an index of the phase shifting gear type of the terminal.
可选的,参考前述实施例有关移相档位的描述,本申请定义了M类ABF移相档位和N类DBF移相档位,每类移相档位有相应的索引。其中,M和N为大于1的正整数。终端200通过第三消息的预设字段3可以携带ABF移相档位的索引和/或DBF移相档位的索引。可以理解,ABF移相档位的索引指示了终端200支持上述M类ABF的移相档位中的哪一类移相档 位;DBF移相档位的索引指示了终端200支持上述N类DBF的移相档位中的哪一类移相档位。可选的,上述M类ABF移相档位和N类DBF移相档位均可以包括{0°,90°,180°,-90°}和{0°,45°,90°,135°,180°,-135°,-90°,-45°}。Optionally, referring to the description of the phase shifting gears in the foregoing embodiments, this application defines M types of ABF phase shifting gears and N types of DBF phase shifting gears, and each type of phase shifting gear has a corresponding index. Wherein, M and N are positive integers greater than 1. The terminal 200 may carry the index of the ABF phase-shifting gear and/or the index of the DBF phase-shifting gear through the preset field 3 of the third message. It can be understood that the index of the ABF phase-shifting gear indicates which type of phase-shifting gear the terminal 200 supports in the above-mentioned M-type ABF phase-shifting gears; the index of the DBF phase-shifting gear indicates that the terminal 200 supports the above-mentioned N-type DBF Which type of phase shift gear in the phase shift gear. Optionally, the above-mentioned M-type ABF phase-shift gears and N-type DBF phase-shift gears can include {0°, 90°, 180°, -90°} and {0°, 45°, 90°, 135° ,180°,-135°,-90°,-45°}.
其中,对于2T/4配置的终端,上报支持哪一类ABF移相档位和DBF移相档位所需的上报信息量为
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000011
其中,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000012
表示对x向上取整。对于1T/4配置的终端和1T/2配置的终端,上报支持哪一类ABF移相档位所需的上报信息量为
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000013
Among them, for a terminal with 2T/4 configuration, the amount of information required to report which type of ABF phase-shifting gear and DBF phase-shifting gear it supports is
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000011
in,
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000012
Indicates that x is rounded up. For a terminal configured with 1T/4 and a terminal configured with 1T/2, the amount of information required to report which type of ABF phase shift gear is supported is
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000013
在一些实施例中,步骤S105和S106是可选的。示例性的,在一种情况下,网络设备100本地存储有终端200的移相档位,或者网络设备100可以通过其他第三方设备间接获取终端200的移相档位。该情况下,终端200无需上报移相档位。In some embodiments, steps S105 and S106 are optional. Exemplarily, in one case, the network device 100 locally stores the phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200, or the network device 100 may obtain the phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200 indirectly through other third-party devices. In this case, the terminal 200 does not need to report the phase shift gear.
可以理解,本申请实施例中,终端200和网络设备100可以实现移相档位的交互,即终端200具备移相档位上报的功能,且网络设备100具备移相档位识别的功能。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can realize the interaction of the phase shifting gear, that is, the terminal 200 has the function of reporting the phase shifting gear, and the network device 100 has the function of identifying the phase shifting gear.
本申请实施例对步骤S101、步骤S103和步骤S105的实施顺序不做具体限定,步骤S101、步骤S103和步骤S105可以按照预设顺序实施,也可以同时实施。可选的,步骤S101、步骤S103和步骤S105同时实施时,第一消息、第二消息和第三消息可以为同一消息,预设字段1、预设字段2和预设字段3为第一消息中的不同字段。The embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the execution order of step S101, step S103, and step S105, and step S101, step S103, and step S105 may be implemented in a preset order, or may be implemented simultaneously. Optionally, when step S101, step S103 and step S105 are implemented simultaneously, the first message, the second message and the third message may be the same message, and the preset field 1, the preset field 2 and the preset field 3 are the first message different fields in .
S107、网络设备100基于终端200的TX通道和天线配置确定终端200的AS-SRS资源的配置信息。S107, the network device 100 determines configuration information of AS-SRS resources of the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200.
本申请实施例将可以实现ABF的终端、可以实现ABF以及DBF的终端,统称为支持HBF的终端。In the embodiment of the present application, a terminal capable of realizing ABF, a terminal capable of realizing ABF and DBF are collectively referred to as a terminal supporting HBF.
在一些实施例中,终端200还通过第一消息的预设字段4指示终端200是否支持HBF。网络设备100接收第一消息后,通过解析第一消息可以确定终端200是否支持HBF。当网络设备100基于第一消息确定终端200支持HBF后,基于终端200的TX通道和天线配置确定终端200的AS-SRS资源的配置信息,并执行S108;否则,按照现有的上行发送技术进行上行发送。可以理解,该实施例中,网络设备100仅为支持HBF的终端配置相应的AS-SRS资源。In some embodiments, the terminal 200 also indicates whether the terminal 200 supports HBF through the preset field 4 of the first message. After receiving the first message, the network device 100 can determine whether the terminal 200 supports HBF by parsing the first message. After the network device 100 determines that the terminal 200 supports HBF based on the first message, determine the configuration information of the AS-SRS resource of the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200, and execute S108; otherwise, proceed according to the existing uplink transmission technology send uplink. It can be understood that in this embodiment, the network device 100 only configures corresponding AS-SRS resources for terminals supporting HBF.
S108、网络设备100向终端200发送AS-SRS资源的配置信息。S108. The network device 100 sends configuration information of the AS-SRS resource to the terminal 200.
可选的,AS-SRS资源的配置信息可以包括SRS的跳频带宽(srs-HoppingBandwidth,bhop)配置、UE级SRS(BSRS)的带宽(srs-Bandwidth)、小区级SRS(CSRS)的带宽配置(srs-BandwidthConfig)、一个子帧内传输的SRS符号数(例如Rel-16LTE标准下的传输符号数(nrofSymbols-r16))、SRS的保护间隔(guard period,GP)的符号数量、SRS的比特位图(bitmap)、SRS频域位置(freqDomainPosition)等。其中,SRS的比特位图(bitmap)用于指示一个子帧内发送的符号为SRS符号或GP符号。Optionally, the AS-SRS resource configuration information may include SRS frequency hopping bandwidth (srs-HoppingBandwidth, bhop) configuration, UE-level SRS (BSRS) bandwidth (srs-Bandwidth), and cell-level SRS (CSRS) bandwidth configuration (srs-BandwidthConfig), the number of SRS symbols transmitted in a subframe (such as the number of symbols transmitted under the Rel-16LTE standard (nrofSymbols-r16)), the number of symbols of the SRS guard period (guard period, GP), and the bits of the SRS Bitmap (bitmap), SRS frequency domain position (freqDomainPosition), etc. Wherein, the SRS bitmap (bitmap) is used to indicate that the symbols sent in one subframe are SRS symbols or GP symbols.
需要说明的是,3GPP协议定义了AS-SRS,但通常网络设备100(例如基站)仅对TDD频段小区内的终端配置AS-SRS资源,对FDD小区内的终端不会配置AS-SRS资源,这是由于目前的技术不能充分利用FDD频段的终端的所有天线对应的信道信息。而在本申请实施例中,网络设备100可以为FDD频段小区内支持HBF的终端配置AS-SRS,获取并利用终端所有天线对应的上行CSI,以提升FDD上行链路性能。It should be noted that the 3GPP protocol defines AS-SRS, but usually the network device 100 (such as a base station) only configures AS-SRS resources for terminals in TDD frequency band cells, and does not configure AS-SRS resources for terminals in FDD cells. This is because the current technology cannot make full use of the channel information corresponding to all the antennas of the terminal in the FDD frequency band. However, in the embodiment of the present application, the network device 100 can configure AS-SRS for the terminal supporting HBF in the FDD frequency band cell, acquire and use the uplink CSI corresponding to all antennas of the terminal, so as to improve the FDD uplink performance.
S109、终端200基于AS-SRS资源的配置信息确定终端200的AS-SRS资源后,在上述AS-SRS资源上通过单天线轮询发送AS-SRS,网络设备100接收终端200通过单天线轮询发送的AS-SRS。S109. After the terminal 200 determines the AS-SRS resource of the terminal 200 based on the configuration information of the AS-SRS resource, it sends the AS-SRS on the AS-SRS resource through single-antenna polling, and the network device 100 receives the terminal 200 through single-antenna polling. Sent AS-SRS.
具体的,终端配置了Y根天线,终端200在上述AS-SRS资源上通过上述Y根天线单天线地轮询发送AS-SRS,网络设备100接收终端200在上述AS-SRS资源上通过上述Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的AS-SRS。Specifically, the terminal is configured with Y antennas, and the terminal 200 uses the above-mentioned Y antennas to poll and send AS-SRS on the above-mentioned AS-SRS resource, and the network device 100 receives the terminal 200 on the above-mentioned AS-SRS resource through the above-mentioned Y The root antenna single-antenna polls the sent AS-SRS.
示例性的,参考前述发送框架1,对于2T/4配置的终端,在不同时频资源上,将多路开关0切换至a输出端口,以通过天线0单天线地发送AS-SRS,将多路开关0切换至c输出端口,以通过天线1单天线地发送AS-SRS,将多路开关1切换至a输出端口,以通过天线2单天线地发送AS-SRS,将多路开关1切换至c输出端口,以通过天线3单天线地发送AS-SRSExemplarily, referring to the aforementioned transmission frame 1, for a terminal configured in 2T/4, on different time-frequency resources, switch the multi-channel switch 0 to the output port a, so as to transmit AS-SRS through a single antenna of antenna 0, and multiple switch 0 to output port c to transmit AS-SRS with single antenna through antenna 1, switch multiple switch 1 to output port a to transmit AS-SRS with single antenna through antenna 2, switch multiple switch 1 to c output port to transmit AS-SRS single-antenna through antenna 3
示例性的,参考前述发送框架2,对于1T/4配置的终端,在不同时频资源上,将多路开关0分别切换至b输出端口、c输出端口、d输出端口和e输出端口,分别通过天线0至天线3单天线地轮询发送AS-SRS。Exemplarily, referring to the aforementioned sending frame 2, for a terminal configured in 1T/4, on different time-frequency resources, the multi-way switch 0 is switched to the b output port, the c output port, the d output port, and the e output port respectively, respectively The AS-SRS is sent in a single-antenna polling manner through antenna 0 to antenna 3 .
示例性的,参考前述发送框架3,对于1T/2配置的终端,在不同时频资源上,将多路开关0分别切换至a输出端口和c输出端口,分别通过天线0和天线1单天线地轮询发送AS-SRS。For example, referring to the aforementioned transmission frame 3, for a terminal configured in 1T/2, on different time-frequency resources, the multiplexer 0 is switched to the a output port and the c output port respectively, and the antenna 0 and the antenna 1 single-antenna Polling to send AS-SRS.
S110、网络设备100基于终端200的Y根天线中的第一天线发送的AS-SRS,估计第一天线对应的上行信道矩阵,第一天线是上述Y根天线中的任意一根天线。S110. The network device 100 estimates an uplink channel matrix corresponding to the first antenna based on the AS-SRS sent by the first antenna among the Y antennas of the terminal 200, where the first antenna is any one of the above Y antennas.
示例性的,网络设备100包括D个接收天线,网络设备100基于第一天线发送的AS-SRS,估计出第一天线对应的D*1维的上行信道矩阵;网络设备100将估计的终端200的Y根天线的上行信道矩阵按天线顺序组成上述Y根天线对应的D*Y维的上行信道矩阵。Exemplarily, the network device 100 includes D receiving antennas, and the network device 100 estimates the D*1-dimensional uplink channel matrix corresponding to the first antenna based on the AS-SRS sent by the first antenna; the network device 100 estimates the terminal 200 The uplink channel matrices of the Y antennas form the D*Y-dimensional uplink channel matrix corresponding to the above Y antennas in order of the antennas.
S111、基于终端200的各天线对应的上行信道矩阵、TX通道和天线配置、移相档位以及各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,网络设备100确定终端200的HBF配置信息,HBF配置信息用于指示终端200的上行的目标发送方式。S111. Based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to each antenna of the terminal 200, the TX channel and antenna configuration, the phase shift position, and the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel, the network device 100 determines the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200, and the HBF configuration information is used for Indicates the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal 200.
S112、网络设备100向终端200发送第一CSI,第一CSI携带HBF配置信息。S112. The network device 100 sends the first CSI to the terminal 200, where the first CSI carries HBF configuration information.
本申请实施例中,网络设备100可以基于终端200的各天线的上行信道估计、TX通道和天线配置、移相档位以及各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,确定各种上行发送方式下的等效信道增益,并确定等效信道增益最大的发送方式为终端200的上行的目标发送方式,获取目标发送方式的HBF配置信息,即通过HBF配置信息指示该目标发送方式的参数。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device 100 can determine the uplink channel in various uplink transmission modes based on the uplink channel estimation of each antenna of the terminal 200, TX channel and antenna configuration, phase shift gear, and the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel. The effective channel gain is determined, and the transmission mode with the largest equivalent channel gain is determined as the uplink target transmission mode of the terminal 200, and the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode is obtained, that is, the parameters of the target transmission mode are indicated through the HBF configuration information.
可选的,HBF配置信息指示的目标发送方式的参数包括:选择哪些TX通道,选择至少两个TX通道时,TX通道间的DBF数字移相值,每个TX通道选择哪些天线;一个TX通道选择至少两根天线时,上述至少两根天线的ABF模拟移相值。参考前述发送框架1至发送框架3,TX通道选择和TX通道间的DBF数字移相值用于控制modem 20的TXS/DBF模块,每个TX通道内的天线选择以及天线间的ABF模拟移相值用于控制AS/ABF模块。Optionally, the parameters of the target transmission method indicated by the HBF configuration information include: which TX channels are selected, when at least two TX channels are selected, the DBF digital phase shift value between the TX channels, which antennas are selected for each TX channel; one TX channel When at least two antennas are selected, the ABF analog phase shift values of the above at least two antennas. Referring to the aforementioned transmission frame 1 to transmission frame 3, the TX channel selection and the DBF digital phase shift value between TX channels are used to control the TXS/DBF module of modem 20, the antenna selection in each TX channel and the ABF analog phase shift between antennas The value is used to control the AS/ABF module.
可选的,若终端配置A个TX通道,ATX通道对应上述Y根天线,则HBF配置信息用于指示:在所述目标发送方式下,所述A个TX通道中上行发送的B个TX通道、所述B个TX通道的数字波束成形DBF的数字移相值、所述B个TX通道中第一TX通道对应的C根天线中上行发送的D根天线和/或所述D根天线的模拟波束成形ABF的模拟移相值,所述第一TX通道是所述B个TX通道中的任一TX通道。Optionally, if the terminal is configured with A TX channels, and the ATX channels correspond to the above-mentioned Y antennas, the HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the B TX channels for uplink transmission among the A TX channels , the digital phase shift value of the digital beamforming DBF of the B TX channels, the D antennas for uplink transmission among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel among the B TX channels, and/or the D antennas An analog phase shift value of analog beamforming ABF, the first TX channel is any one of the B TX channels.
在一些实施例中,步骤S111具体可以包括Z1至Z4。其中:In some embodiments, step S111 may specifically include Z1 to Z4. in:
Z1、网络设备100基于终端200的TX通道和天线配置和移相档位确定适用于终端200的第一码本集。Z2、网络设备100基于各TX通道支持的最大发送功率对第一码本集进行功率修正,获得修正后的第二码本集。Z3、基于估计的终端200的上行信道矩阵,获取第二码本集中每个码字对应的等效信道增益。Z4、基于第二码本集中等效信道增益最大的第一码字 确定终端200的HBF配置信息。Z1. The network device 100 determines the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 and the phase shift gear. Z2. The network device 100 performs power correction on the first codebook set based on the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel, and obtains a second codebook set after correction. Z3. Obtain an equivalent channel gain corresponding to each codeword in the second codebook set based on the estimated uplink channel matrix of the terminal 200 . Z4. Determine the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 based on the first codeword with the largest equivalent channel gain in the second codebook set.
可选的,步骤Z4中每个码字对应的等效信道增益为该码字与终端200的Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵的乘积向量的模平方。Optionally, the equivalent channel gain corresponding to each codeword in step Z4 is the modulus square of the product vector of the codeword and the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas of the terminal 200 .
可以理解,本申请实施例中,通过对码本集中的码字进行功率修正,使得使用该码字的终端200的各TX通道的信号发送功率之和满足终端200在当前频段下的最大发送功率,且每个TX通道满足该通道所支持的最大发送功率,从而尽肯能地提升了上行发送增益。It can be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the power correction is performed on the codewords in the codebook set so that the sum of the signal transmission power of each TX channel of the terminal 200 using the codeword meets the maximum transmission power of the terminal 200 in the current frequency band , and each TX channel satisfies the maximum transmit power supported by the channel, thereby improving the uplink transmit gain as much as possible.
在一些实施例中,参考前述实施例有关TPMI码本的描述,针对特定配置的终端,第一码本集可以采用TPMI码本对应的码本集1或码本集2。下面以2T/4配置的终端、1T/4配置的终端和1T/2配置的终端采用TPMI码本为例,对上述三种配置的终端在步骤S111中的实现做具体说明。In some embodiments, referring to the description of the TPMI codebook in the foregoing embodiments, for a terminal with a specific configuration, the first codebook set may use codebook set 1 or codebook set 2 corresponding to the TPMI codebook. Taking the 2T/4 configured terminal, the 1T/4 configured terminal and the 1T/2 configured terminal using the TPMI codebook as an example, the implementation of the above three configured terminals in step S111 will be described in detail below.
第一种配置:2T/4配置的终端The first configuration: terminal with 2T/4 configuration
可选的,步骤Z1中,当终端200为2T/4配置的终端,且ABF和DBF的移相精度均为90°,网络设备100确定适用于终端200的第一码本集为码本集1。步骤Z2中,网络设备100根据终端200上报的功率能力,对码本集1进行功率修正,获得第二码本集。终端200上报的功率能力可以包括前述功率能力0、功率能力1和功率能力2。2T/4配置的终端可以参考前述发送框架1,具体的,Optionally, in step Z1, when the terminal 200 is a terminal configured with 2T/4, and the phase shift accuracy of ABF and DBF are both 90°, the network device 100 determines that the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 is the codebook set 1. In step Z2, the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 1 according to the power capability reported by the terminal 200 to obtain a second codebook set. The power capability reported by the terminal 200 may include the aforementioned power capability 0, power capability 1, and power capability 2. A terminal configured with 2T/4 may refer to the aforementioned transmission frame 1. Specifically,
当终端200上报功率能力0时,即TX0通道和TX1通道支持的最大发送功率均为P_max,网络设备100对码本集1作如下的功率修正:When the terminal 200 reports a power capability of 0, that is, the maximum transmission power supported by the TX0 channel and the TX1 channel is both P_max, the network device 100 performs the power correction on the codebook set 1 as follows:
W 0,k=W kα 0;k W 0,k = W k α 0;k
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000014
其中,W k为码本集1中第k个码字,α 0;k为码本集1的第k个码字的功率能力0的修正参数,W 0,k为经过功率能力0的功率修正后的第二码本集的第k个码字。 Among them, W k is the kth codeword in the codebook set 1, α 0; k is the correction parameter of the power capability 0 of the kth codeword in the codebook set 1, W 0, k is the power passing through the power capability 0 The kth codeword of the modified second codebook set.
示例性的,码本集1中索引为26的码字W 10的各码元与TX通道的关系如图6所示,由该码字可知,W 10对应的TX0通道和TX1通道的发送功率均为(P_max/4),修正后的W 0,10对应的TX0通道和TX1通道的最大发送功率均为(P_max/2),满足功率能力0指示的TX0通道和TX1通道所支持的最大发送功率,且两个TX通道对应的功率之和满足终端200支持的最大发送功率P_max。 Exemplarily, the relationship between each symbol of the codeword W 10 whose index is 26 in the codebook set 1 and the TX channel is shown in FIG. Both are (P_max/4), and the maximum transmission power of the TX0 channel and TX1 channel corresponding to the revised W 0,10 are both (P_max/2), which meets the maximum transmission supported by the TX0 channel and TX1 channel indicated by the power capability 0 power, and the sum of the power corresponding to the two TX channels satisfies the maximum transmit power P_max supported by the terminal 200.
当终端200上报功率能力1时,即TX0通道支持的最大发送功率为P_max,TX1通道支持的最大发送功率为(P_max/2),网络设备100对码本集1作如下的功率修正:When the terminal 200 reports power capability 1, that is, the maximum transmission power supported by the TX0 channel is P_max, and the maximum transmission power supported by the TX1 channel is (P_max/2), the network device 100 performs the power correction on the codebook set 1 as follows:
W 1,k=W kα 1;k W 1,k = W k α 1; k
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000015
其中,α 1;k为码本集1的第k个码字的功率能力1的修正参数,W 1,k为经过功率能力1的功率修正后的第二码本集的第k个码字。 Among them, α 1;k is the correction parameter of the power capability 1 of the k-th codeword of the codebook set 1, and W 1,k is the k-th codeword of the second codebook set after the power correction of the power capability 1 .
当终端200上报功率能力2时,即TX0通道和TX1通道支持的最大发送功率均为(P_max/2),网络设备100对码本集1作如下的功率修正:When the terminal 200 reports the power capability 2, that is, the maximum transmission power supported by the TX0 channel and the TX1 channel are both (P_max/2), the network device 100 performs the following power correction on the codebook set 1:
W 2,k=W kα 2;k W 2,k = W k α 2;k
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000016
其中,α 2;k为码本集1的第k个码字的功率能力1的修正参数,W 2,k为经过功率能力1的功率修正后的第二码本集的第k个码字。 Among them, α 2;k is the correction parameter of the power capability 1 of the k-th codeword of the codebook set 1, and W 2,k is the k-th codeword of the second codebook set after the power correction of the power capability 1 .
第二种配置:1T/4配置的终端The second configuration: terminal with 1T/4 configuration
可选的,步骤Z1中,当终端200为1T/4配置的终端,且ABF移相精度为90°,网络设备100确定适用于终端200的第一码本集为码本集1。步骤Z2中,网络设备100根据终端200的TX通道的功率能力,对码本集1进行功率修正,获得第二码本集。Optionally, in step Z1, when the terminal 200 is configured with 1T/4 and the ABF phase shift accuracy is 90°, the network device 100 determines that the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 is the codebook set 1. In step Z2, the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 1 according to the power capability of the TX channel of the terminal 200 to obtain the second codebook set.
可选的,参考步骤S103的相关描述,配置1个TX通道的终端,TX通道所支持的最大发送功率可以为P_max。具体的,1T/4配置的终端200的功率修正方式可以参考2T/4配置的终端200的功率能力0的修正方式,此处不再赘述。Optionally, referring to the relevant description of step S103, a terminal with one TX channel is configured, and the maximum transmission power supported by the TX channel may be P_max. Specifically, the power correction method of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/4 may refer to the method of modifying the power capability 0 of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4, which will not be repeated here.
第三种配置:1T/2配置的终端The third configuration: terminal with 1T/2 configuration
可选的,步骤Z1中,当终端200为1T/2配置的终端,且ABF移相精度为90°,网络设备100确定适用于终端200的第一码本集为码本集2。步骤Z2中,网络设备100根据终端200的TX通道的功率能力,对码本集2进行功率修正,获得第二码本集。Optionally, in step Z1, when the terminal 200 is configured in 1T/2 and the ABF phase shift accuracy is 90°, the network device 100 determines that the first codebook set applicable to the terminal 200 is the codebook set 2. In step Z2, the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 2 according to the power capability of the TX channel of the terminal 200 to obtain the second codebook set.
可选的,参考步骤S103的相关描述,配置1个TX通道的终端,TX通道所支持的最大发送功率可以为P_max。具体的,网络设备100对码本集2作如下的功率修正:Optionally, referring to the relevant description of step S103, a terminal with one TX channel is configured, and the maximum transmission power supported by the TX channel may be P_max. Specifically, the network device 100 performs power correction on the codebook set 2 as follows:
W′ k=W kβ k W′ k =W k β k
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000017
其中,β k为码本集2的第k个码字的修正参数,W′ k为经过功率修正后的第二码本集的第k个码字。 Among them, β k is the correction parameter of the kth codeword of codebook set 2, and W′ k is the kth codeword of the second codebook set after power correction.
可选的,网络设备100通过第一CSI中的PMI的字段携带HBF配置信息。Optionally, the network device 100 uses the PMI field in the first CSI to carry the HBF configuration information.
本申请实施例中,HBF配置信息的内容的展现方式包括但不限于方式1和方式2。In the embodiment of the present application, the presentation manners of the content of the HBF configuration information include but not limited to manner 1 and manner 2.
在方式1中,HBF配置信息为第一码字在码本集中的索引。In manner 1, the HBF configuration information is the index of the first codeword in the codebook set.
在方式2中,HBF配置信息为目标发送方式的参数。In mode 2, the HBF configuration information is a parameter of the target sending mode.
下面对方式2中HBF配置信息的信息反馈量进行介绍。参考前述实施例有关移相档位的描述,本申请定义了M类ABF移相档位,即
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000018
包含K个移相档位,以及N类DBF移相档位,即
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000019
包含L个移相档位。下面以终端200采用
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000021
为例进行说明。
The information feedback amount of the HBF configuration information in mode 2 will be introduced below. With reference to the description of the phase-shifting gears in the foregoing embodiments, this application defines the M-type ABF phase-shifting gears, namely
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000018
Contains K phase-shifting gears, and N types of DBF phase-shifting gears, namely
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000019
Contains L phase shifting gears. The following uses the terminal 200
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000020
and
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000021
Take this as an example.
对于具备发送框架2的2T/4配置的终端200,TX0通道(或TX1)的单天线发送有2种选择,2根天线进行ABF发送的ABF移相档位有K种选择,共(K+2)种选择。2个TX通道中选择一个进行单通道发送有2种选择,2个TX通道进行DBF发送的DBF移相档位有L种选择,共(L+2)种选择。综上所述,2T/4配置的终端200的HBF配置信息的信息反馈量为
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000022
For the terminal 200 with the 2T/4 configuration of the transmission frame 2, there are two options for the single-antenna transmission of the TX0 channel (or TX1), and there are K options for the ABF phase-shifting gear for ABF transmission by two antennas, a total of (K+ 2) Choices. There are 2 options for selecting one of the 2 TX channels for single-channel transmission, and there are L options for the DBF phase-shift gear for DBF transmission of the 2 TX channels, a total of (L+2) options. To sum up, the information feedback amount of the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 is
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000022
对于具备发送框架2的1T/4配置的终端200,TX0通道单天线发送有4种选择,4根天线进行ABF发送时后三根天线中的每根天线的ABF移相档位有K种选择。综上所述,1T/4配置的终端200的HBF配置信息的信息反馈量为
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000023
For the terminal 200 with the 1T/4 configuration of the transmission frame 2, there are 4 options for single-antenna transmission in the TX0 channel, and there are K options for the ABF phase shift position of each of the last three antennas when 4 antennas perform ABF transmission. To sum up, the information feedback amount of the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/4 is
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000023
对于具备发送框架3的1T/2配置的终端200,TX0通道单天线发送有2种选择,2根天线进行ABF发送时第二根天线的ABF移相档位有K种选择。综上所述,1T/4配置的终端200的HBF配置信息的信息反馈量为
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000024
For the terminal 200 with the 1T/2 configuration of the transmission frame 3, there are two options for single-antenna transmission on the TX0 channel, and there are K options for the ABF phase-shifting gear of the second antenna when two antennas perform ABF transmission. To sum up, the information feedback amount of the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/4 is
Figure PCTCN2022091684-appb-000024
可选的,第二码本集的每个码字对应的发送总功率小于等于终端支持的最大发送功率,第二码本集的每个码字中第一TX通道的C根天线对应的C个码元的发送功率之和小于等于 第一TX通道支持的最大发送功率,第二码本集的每个码字用于指示终端的一种上行发送方式。Optionally, the total transmit power corresponding to each codeword in the second codebook set is less than or equal to the maximum transmit power supported by the terminal, and the C antennas corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel in each codeword in the second codebook set The sum of the transmission powers of symbols is less than or equal to the maximum transmission power supported by the first TX channel, and each codeword in the second codebook set is used to indicate an uplink transmission mode of the terminal.
可选的,上述第一TX通道的C根天线对应的C个码元间的相位差为终端支持的ABF的移相档位,当上述A个TX通道还包括第二TX通道时,第一TX通道和第二YX通道的第一根天线对应的两个码元的相位差为终端支持的DBF的移相档位。Optionally, the phase difference between the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel is the ABF phase shift gear supported by the terminal. When the A TX channels also include the second TX channel, the first The phase difference between the two symbols corresponding to the first antenna of the TX channel and the second YX channel is the phase shifting gear of the DBF supported by the terminal.
S113、终端200基于HBF配置信息,配置上行发送的参数。S113. The terminal 200 configures parameters for uplink transmission based on the HBF configuration information.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例可以进行全带级的上行信道估计以及CSI反馈,也可以针对每个子带进行子带级的上行信道估计以及CSI反馈,本实施例对此不做具体限定。It should be noted that in this embodiment of the present application, full-band level uplink channel estimation and CSI feedback can be performed, and subband level uplink channel estimation and CSI feedback can also be performed for each subband, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment.
终端基于第一CSI反馈的HBF配置信息,从中解析出TX通道选择、TX通道间的DBF数字移相值、每个TX通道内的天线选择和天线间的ABF模拟移相值等参数。Based on the HBF configuration information fed back by the first CSI, the terminal analyzes parameters such as TX channel selection, DBF digital phase shift value between TX channels, antenna selection in each TX channel, and ABF analog phase shift value between antennas.
以终端200配置发送框架1为例进行举例说明。当HBF配置信息指示选择TX0通道和TX1通道,终端200基于TX通道间的DBF模拟移相值进行DBF发送;当HBF配置信息指示选择TX0通道,且选择TX0对应的两根天线中的一个,例如天线0时,终端200上行发送时将该TX通道的多路开关0切换至输出端口a,通过该TX通道的天线0进行单天线发送;当HBF配置信息指示选择TX0通道,且选择TX0对应的两根天线,终端200上行发送时将该TX通道的多路开关0切换至输出端口b,该TX通道基于两根天线的ABF模拟移相值进行ABF发送。The terminal 200 configures the sending frame 1 as an example for illustration. When the HBF configuration information indicates that the TX0 channel and the TX1 channel are selected, the terminal 200 performs DBF transmission based on the DBF analog phase shift value between the TX channels; when the HBF configuration information indicates that the TX0 channel is selected, and one of the two antennas corresponding to TX0 is selected, for example When the antenna 0 is used, the terminal 200 switches the multi-channel switch 0 of the TX channel to the output port a when transmitting uplink, and performs single-antenna transmission through the antenna 0 of the TX channel; when the HBF configuration information indicates that the TX0 channel is selected, and the TX0 corresponding Two antennas, the terminal 200 switches the multi-channel switch 0 of the TX channel to the output port b when the terminal 200 transmits uplink, and the TX channel performs ABF transmission based on the ABF analog phase shift values of the two antennas.
本申请实施例提供的波束成形方法具有如下有益效果:The beamforming method provided in the embodiment of the present application has the following beneficial effects:
1、参考图5A和图5C所示的发送框架,本申请实施例提供的AS/ABF模块中1个发送通道可以对应2根天线,为终端实现上行ABF提供了硬件支撑。1. Referring to the transmission framework shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5C, one transmission channel in the AS/ABF module provided by the embodiment of the present application can correspond to two antennas, which provides hardware support for the terminal to realize uplink ABF.
2、本申请实施例中,由网络设备100根据上行信道估计确定和反馈HBF配置信息,不依赖于上下行信道互易性,该波束成形方法适用于FDD频段和TDD频段。2. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device 100 determines and feeds back the HBF configuration information according to the uplink channel estimation, and does not depend on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. The beamforming method is applicable to the FDD frequency band and the TDD frequency band.
3、本申请实施例中,网络设备100可以根据信道的实际环境,通过每根天线的上行信道估计获得不同发送方式的等效信道增益,自适应地为终端200选择最优的上行发送方式,这样,可以自适应地应对各种信道环境。3. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device 100 can obtain the equivalent channel gain of different transmission modes through the uplink channel estimation of each antenna according to the actual environment of the channel, and adaptively select the optimal uplink transmission mode for the terminal 200, In this way, various channel environments can be adaptively dealt with.
示例性的,对于2T/4配置的终端200,当4根天线对应的信道强度比较均衡且信道相关性较高时,网络设备100可以通过HBF配置信息指示终端200通过4根天线进行HBF发送;当4根天线对应的信道强度不均衡且信道相关性较低时,网络设备100可以基于实际的上行信道估计结果,指示终端200通过3根、2根或1根天线进行上行发送。对于1T/2配置的终端,当2根天线对应的信道强度比较均衡且信道相关性较高时,网络设备100可以通过HBF配置信息指示终端200进行上行ABF发送。当2根天线对应的信道强度比较不均衡且信道相关性较低时,网络设备100可以指示终端200使用信道质量较好的单天线进行上行发送。Exemplarily, for the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4, when the channel strength corresponding to the four antennas is relatively balanced and the channel correlation is high, the network device 100 may use the HBF configuration information to instruct the terminal 200 to perform HBF transmission through the four antennas; When the channel strength corresponding to the 4 antennas is unbalanced and the channel correlation is low, the network device 100 may instruct the terminal 200 to perform uplink transmission through 3, 2 or 1 antennas based on the actual uplink channel estimation result. For a terminal configured in 1T/2, when the channel strengths corresponding to the two antennas are relatively balanced and the channel correlation is high, the network device 100 may instruct the terminal 200 to perform uplink ABF transmission through the HBF configuration information. When the channel strengths corresponding to the two antennas are relatively unbalanced and the channel correlation is low, the network device 100 may instruct the terminal 200 to use a single antenna with better channel quality for uplink transmission.
4、通过本申请实施例提供的波束成形方法,对于2T/4配置的终端200和1T/4配置的终端200,在相同的总发送功率的情况下,相比1T/1配置的终端200的上行发送,最大BF增益可以达到6dB,相比2T/2配置的终端200进行非相干的上行发送,最大BF增益可以达到6dB,相比前述方案1中2T/2配置的终端200采用上行相干码本的上行发送,最大BF增益可以达到3dB;对于1T/2配置的终端200,相比1T/1配置的终端200的上行发送,最大BF增益可以达到3dB。4. Through the beamforming method provided by the embodiment of this application, for the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 and the terminal 200 configured in 1T/4, under the same total transmission power, compared with the terminal 200 configured in 1T/1 For uplink transmission, the maximum BF gain can reach 6dB. Compared with the non-coherent uplink transmission of the terminal 200 configured with 2T/2, the maximum BF gain can reach 6dB. Compared with the terminal 200 configured with 2T/2 in the above scheme 1, the uplink coherent code is used. The maximum BF gain can reach 3dB for the uplink transmission of this system; for the terminal 200 configured in 1T/2, compared with the uplink transmission of the terminal 200 configured in 1T/1, the maximum BF gain can reach 3dB.
5、本申请实施例对天线与RX通道的连接关系不做具体限定,一个RX通道可以对应1根天线,终端具有4个接收通道时,终端只需要4根天线。相比于图4所示的方案2的发送 框架,终端200不需要额外增加天线,节省了成本。此外,相比于方案2,AS/ABF模块对下行信号可以不进行合路处理,所提供的上行的BF发送方法,对下行通信没有影响。5. The embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the connection relationship between the antenna and the RX channel. One RX channel may correspond to one antenna. When the terminal has four receiving channels, the terminal only needs four antennas. Compared with the transmission framework of solution 2 shown in FIG. 4 , the terminal 200 does not need to add additional antennas, which saves costs. In addition, compared with solution 2, the AS/ABF module does not need to perform combination processing on downlink signals, and the uplink BF sending method provided has no impact on downlink communication.
下面结合图7B和图7C对本实施例提供的波束成形方法的BF增益进行示例性说明。图7B和图7C为本申请实施例提供的2T/4配置的终端200在LOS场景中的上行BF增益的示意图,图7B和图7C所示的曲线的横坐标为来波角度,纵坐标为上行BF增益。在不同来波角度下,终端200可以获取网络设备100反馈的目标码字,并基于该码字进行上行发送获得上行BF增益。其中,图7B中,2T/4配置的终端200的ABF移相档位和DBF移相档位均只有{0°,90°,180°,-90°}这4个移相档位。由图7B可知,当来波方向为0°、60°、90°和120°时,目标码字与来波角度完全匹配,上述波束成形方法可以达到6dB的BF增益,在其它来波方向的上行BF增益稍低,最低约为5.2dB。图7C中,2T/4配置的终端200的ABF移相档位和DBF移相档位均只有{0°,45°,90°,135°,180°,-135°,-90°,-45°}这8个移相档位。由图7C可知,当来波方向为0°、45°、60°、75°、90°、105°、120°和135°时,目标码字与来波角度完全匹配,上述波束成形方法可以达到6dB的BF增益,在其它来波方向上BF增益最低约为5.8dB增益。综上可知,移相精度越高,达到6dB的BF增益的概率越大,所能达到的最小增益也越大。The BF gain of the beamforming method provided in this embodiment is exemplarily described below with reference to FIG. 7B and FIG. 7C . 7B and 7C are schematic diagrams of the uplink BF gain of the 2T/4 configured terminal 200 in the LOS scenario provided by the embodiment of the present application. The abscissa of the curves shown in FIG. 7B and FIG. 7C is the incoming wave angle, and the ordinate is Uplink BF gain. Under different incoming wave angles, the terminal 200 can obtain the target codeword fed back by the network device 100, and perform uplink transmission based on the codeword to obtain an uplink BF gain. Wherein, in FIG. 7B , both the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 only have four phase-shifting gears of {0°, 90°, 180°, -90°}. It can be seen from Fig. 7B that when the direction of arrival is 0°, 60°, 90° and 120°, the target codeword completely matches the angle of arrival, and the above-mentioned beamforming method can achieve a BF gain of 6dB. The uplink BF gain is slightly lower, the lowest being about 5.2dB. In Fig. 7C, the ABF phase-shifting gears and DBF phase-shifting gears of the terminal 200 configured in 2T/4 are only {0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, -135°, -90°, - 45°} These 8 phase shift positions. It can be seen from Figure 7C that when the direction of arrival is 0°, 45°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 105°, 120° and 135°, the target codeword matches the angle of arrival completely, and the above beamforming method can A BF gain of 6dB is achieved, and the minimum BF gain in other incoming wave directions is about 5.8dB gain. It can be seen from the above that the higher the phase shifting accuracy is, the greater the probability of achieving a BF gain of 6dB, and the greater the minimum gain that can be achieved.
下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的终端200和网络设备100的功能模块。The functional modules of the terminal 200 and the network device 100 involved in the embodiment of the present application are introduced below.
本申请实施例可以根据上述波束成形方法对终端200和网络设备100进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以终端设备的各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将终端设备的两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment of the present application, the functional modules of the terminal 200 and the network device 100 can be divided according to the above-mentioned beamforming method. integrated in one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
本申请实施例中,无线接入协议体系包括RRC层、媒体访问控制层(Media Access Control,MAC)和物理层(Physical Layer,PHY),终端200和网络设备100的各功能模块的功能由相应的协议层实现。In the embodiment of the present application, the wireless access protocol system includes an RRC layer, a media access control layer (Media Access Control, MAC) and a physical layer (Physical Layer, PHY), and the functions of each functional module of the terminal 200 and the network device 100 are determined by corresponding implementation of the protocol layer.
示例性的,图8示出了本申请实施例涉及的终端200的一种结构示意图。如图8所示,终端200的RRC层包括TX通道和天线配置上报模块、功率能力上报模块和移相档位上报模块,PHY层上行包括AS-SRS发送模块、TXS/DBF模块和AS/DBF模块,物理层下行包括CSI解析模块。其中:Exemplarily, FIG. 8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal 200 involved in this embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 8, the RRC layer of the terminal 200 includes a TX channel and antenna configuration reporting module, a power capability reporting module, and a phase shift gear reporting module, and the PHY layer uplink includes an AS-SRS sending module, a TXS/DBF module and an AS/DBF module, the physical layer downlink includes a CSI parsing module. in:
TX通道和天线配置上报模块用于上报终端200的TX通道和天线配置。可选的,TX通道和天线配置上报模块上报终端200的配置类型的索引。The TX channel and antenna configuration reporting module is used to report the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 . Optionally, the TX channel and antenna configuration reporting module reports the index of the configuration type of the terminal 200 .
功率能力上报模块用于上报终端200的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率。可选的,功率能力上报模块上报终端200的功率能力类型的索引。The power capability reporting module is used to report the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200 . Optionally, the power capability reporting module reports the index of the power capability type of the terminal 200 .
移相档位上报模块用于上报终端200的ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。可选的,移相档位上报模块上报终端200的ABF移相精度和/或DBF移相精度。可选的,移相档位上报模块上报终端200的ABF移相档位的索引和/或DBF移相档位的索引。The phase shift gear reporting module is used to report the ABF phase shift gear and/or DBF phase shift gear of the terminal 200 . Optionally, the phase shift gear reporting module reports the ABF phase shift accuracy and/or DBF phase shift accuracy of the terminal 200 . Optionally, the phase-shift gear reporting module reports the index of the ABF phase-shift gear and/or the index of the DBF phase-shift gear of the terminal 200 .
AS-SRS发送模块用于在网络设备100配置的AS-SRS资源上通过单天线轮询发送的AS-SRS。The AS-SRS sending module is used for polling the AS-SRS sent by the single-antenna polling on the AS-SRS resources configured by the network device 100 .
CSI解析模块用于解析网络设备100发送的CSI,获取上行发送的HBF配置信息,HBF配置信息用于指示选择哪些TX通道,选择至少两个TX通道时,TX通道间的DBF数字移 相值,每个TX通道选择哪些天线;一个TX通道选择至少两根天线时,上述至少两根天线的ABF模拟移相值。The CSI analysis module is used to analyze the CSI sent by the network device 100, and obtain the HBF configuration information sent uplink. The HBF configuration information is used to indicate which TX channels are selected. When at least two TX channels are selected, the DBF digital phase shift value between the TX channels, Which antennas are selected for each TX channel; when at least two antennas are selected for one TX channel, the ABF analog phase shift values of the above at least two antennas.
TXS/DBF模块用于根据基于HBF配置信息指示的TX通道选择,确定上行发送的TX通道以及TX通道的DBF数字移相值。The TXS/DBF module is used to determine the TX channel for uplink transmission and the DBF digital phase shift value of the TX channel according to the TX channel selection indicated by the HBF configuration information.
AS/DBF模块用于根据HBF配置信息指示的天线选择,确定上行发送的天线以及天线的ABF模拟移相值。The AS/DBF module is used to determine the antenna for uplink transmission and the ABF analog phase shift value of the antenna according to the antenna selection indicated by the HBF configuration information.
示例性的,图9示出了本申请实施例涉及的网络设备100的一种结构示意图。如图9所示,网络设备100的RRC层包括TX通道和天线配置识别模块、功率能力识别模块和移相档位识别模块,MAC层包括AS-SRS资源配置模块,PHY层上行包括上行信道估计模块、CSI信息确定模块,物理层下行包括CSI反馈模块。其中,Exemplarily, FIG. 9 shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device 100 involved in this embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 9, the RRC layer of the network device 100 includes a TX channel and antenna configuration identification module, a power capability identification module, and a phase shift gear identification module, the MAC layer includes an AS-SRS resource configuration module, and the PHY layer uplink includes uplink channel estimation module, a CSI information determination module, and a physical layer downlink including a CSI feedback module. in,
TX通道和天线配置识别模块用于识别终端200上报的TX通道和天线配置,确定终端200的TX通道和天线配置。可选的,TX通道和天线配置识别模块基于终端200上报的配置类型的索引,确定终端200的TX通道和天线配置。The TX channel and antenna configuration identification module is used to identify the TX channel and antenna configuration reported by the terminal 200, and determine the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200. Optionally, the TX channel and antenna configuration identification module determines the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 based on the configuration type index reported by the terminal 200 .
功率能力识别模块用于识别终端200上报的功率能力,确定终端200的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率。可选的,功率能力识别模块基于终端200上报的HBF功率类型的索引,确定终端200的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率。The power capability identification module is used to identify the power capability reported by the terminal 200, and determine the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200. Optionally, the power capability identification module determines the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel of the terminal 200 based on the index of the HBF power type reported by the terminal 200 .
移相档位识别模块用于识别终端200上报的ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。可选的,移相档位识别模块基于终端200上报的ABF移相精度,确定终端200的ABF移相档位;基于终端200上报的DBF移相精度,确定终端200的DBF移相档位。可选的,移相档位识别模块基于终端200上报的ABF移相档位的索引,确定终端200的ABF移相档位;基于终端200上报的DBF移相档位的索引,确定终端200的DBF移相档位。The phase-shift gear identification module is used to identify the ABF phase-shift gear and/or the DBF phase-shift gear reported by the terminal 200 . Optionally, the phase-shift gear identification module determines the ABF phase-shift gear of the terminal 200 based on the ABF phase-shift accuracy reported by the terminal 200; and determines the DBF phase-shift gear of the terminal 200 based on the DBF phase-shift accuracy reported by the terminal 200. Optionally, the phase-shifting gear identification module determines the ABF phase-shifting gear of the terminal 200 based on the index of the ABF phase-shifting gear reported by the terminal 200; based on the index of the DBF phase-shifting gear reported by the terminal 200, determines the DBF phase shift gear.
AS-SRS资源配置模块用于基于终端200的TX通道和天线配置为终端200配置AS-SRS资源。The AS-SRS resource configuration module is configured to configure AS-SRS resources for the terminal 200 based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal 200 .
上行信道估计模块用于基于终端200通过单天线轮询发送的AS-SRS,估计终端200的每根天线对应的上行信道矩阵。The uplink channel estimation module is configured to estimate the uplink channel matrix corresponding to each antenna of the terminal 200 based on the AS-SRS sent by the terminal 200 through single-antenna polling.
CSI信息确定模块用于基于各天线对应的上行信道矩阵、TX通道和天线配置、移相档位以及各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,确定终端200的HBF配置信息。The CSI information determination module is used to determine the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to each antenna, TX channel and antenna configuration, phase shift gear and the maximum transmission power supported by each TX channel.
CSI反馈模块用于反馈终端200的HBF配置信息。The CSI feedback module is used to feed back the HBF configuration information of the terminal 200 .
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种终端200的结构。The structure of a terminal 200 provided in the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图10示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种终端200的结构。FIG. 10 exemplarily shows the structure of a terminal 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application.
如图10所示,终端200可包括:一个或多个终端设备处理器101、存储器102、通信接口103、接收器105、发射器106、耦合器107、天线108、终端设备接口109。这些部件可通过总线104或者其他方式连接,图10以通过总线连接为例。其中:As shown in FIG. 10 , the terminal 200 may include: one or more terminal device processors 101 , memory 102 , communication interface 103 , receiver 105 , transmitter 106 , coupler 107 , antenna 108 , and terminal device interface 109 . These components may be connected via the bus 104 or in other ways, and FIG. 10 takes the connection via the bus as an example. in:
通信接口103可用于终端200与其他通信设备,例如网络设备,进行通信。具体地,网络设备可以是图9所示的网络设备100。具体地,通信接口103可以是5G通信接口,也可以是未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,终端200还可以配置有有线的通信接口103,例如局域接入网(local access network,LAN)接口。发射器106可用于对终端设备处理器101输出的信号进行发射处理。接收器105可用于对天线108接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理。The communication interface 103 can be used for the terminal 200 to communicate with other communication devices, such as network devices. Specifically, the network device may be the network device 100 shown in FIG. 9 . Specifically, the communication interface 103 may be a 5G communication interface, or may be a communication interface of a future new air interface. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 103, such as a local access network (local access network, LAN) interface. The transmitter 106 can be used to transmit and process the signal output by the terminal device processor 101 . The receiver 105 can be used for receiving and processing the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 108 .
在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器106和接收器105可看作一个无线调制解调器。在终端200中,发射器106和接收器105的数量均可以是一个或者多个。天线108可用于将传输 线中的电磁能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器107用于将天线108接收到的移动通信信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器105。In some embodiments of the present application, the transmitter 106 and the receiver 105 can be regarded as a wireless modem. In the terminal 200, the number of the transmitter 106 and the number of the receiver 105 can be one or more. Antenna 108 may be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line to electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space to electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. The coupler 107 is used to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 108 into multiple paths and distribute them to multiple receivers 105 .
除了图10所示的发射器106和接收器105,终端200还可包括其他通信部件,例如GPS模块、蓝牙(bluetooth)模块、无线高保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)模块等。不限于无线通信,终端200还可以配置有线网络接口(如LAN接口)来支持有线通信。In addition to the transmitter 106 and receiver 105 shown in FIG. 10 , the terminal 200 may also include other communication components, such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth (bluetooth) module, a wireless high-fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
终端200还可包括输入输出模块。输入输出模块可用于实现终端200和其他终端设备/外部环境之间的交互,可主要包括音频输入输出模块、按键输入模块以及显示器等。具体地,输入输出模块还可包括:摄像头、触摸屏以及传感器等等。其中,输入输出模块均通过终端设备接口109与终端设备处理器101进行通信。The terminal 200 may further include an input and output module. The input and output module can be used to realize the interaction between the terminal 200 and other terminal devices/external environments, and can mainly include an audio input and output module, a key input module, and a display. Specifically, the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like. Wherein, both the input and output modules communicate with the terminal device processor 101 through the terminal device interface 109 .
存储器102与终端设备处理器101耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体地,存储器102可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器102可以存储操作***(下述简称***),例如ANDROID,IOS,WINDOWS,或者LINUX等嵌入式操作***。存储器102还可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。The memory 102 is coupled with the terminal device processor 101 and is used for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. Specifically, the memory 102 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. The memory 102 may store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as the system), such as embedded operating systems such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX. The memory 102 can also store a network communication program, which can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, and one or more network devices.
在本申请的一些实施例中,存储器102可用于存储本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的波束成形方法在终端200侧的实现程序。关于本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的波束成形方法的实现,请参考上述实施例。In some embodiments of the present application, the memory 102 may be used to store an implementation program on the terminal 200 side of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application. For implementation of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, please refer to the foregoing embodiments.
终端设备处理器101可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体地,终端设备处理器101可用于调用存储于存储器102中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的波束成形方法在终端200侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。The terminal device processor 101 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal device processor 101 can be used to call a program stored in the memory 102, such as the implementation program of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
需要说明的是,图10所示的终端200仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,终端200还可以包括更多或更少的部件,在此不作限定。It should be noted that the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 10 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the terminal 200 may include more or fewer components, which is not limited here.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备100的结构。The structure of a network device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图11示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备100的结构。FIG. 11 exemplarily shows the structure of a network device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application.
如图11所示,网络设备100可包括:一个或多个网络设备处理器201、存储器202、通信接口203、接收器205、发射器206、耦合器207、天线208、网络设备接口209。这些部件可通过总线204或者其他方式连接,图11以通过总线连接为例。其中:As shown in FIG. 11 , the network device 100 may include: one or more network device processors 201 , memory 202 , communication interface 203 , receiver 205 , transmitter 206 , coupler 207 , antenna 208 , and network device interface 209 . These components may be connected through the bus 204 or in other ways, and FIG. 11 takes the connection through the bus as an example. in:
通信接口203可用于网络设备100与其他通信设备,例如终端设备,进行通信。具体地,终端设备可以是图10所示的终端200。具体地,通信接口203可以是5G通信接口,也可以是未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,网络设备100还可以配置有有线的通信接口203,例如局域接入网(local access network,LAN)接口。发射器206可用于对网络设备处理器201输出的信号进行发射处理。接收器205可用于对天线208接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理。The communication interface 203 can be used for the network device 100 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices. Specifically, the terminal device may be the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 10 . Specifically, the communication interface 203 may be a 5G communication interface, or may be a communication interface of a future new air interface. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the network device 100 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 203, such as a local access network (local access network, LAN) interface. The transmitter 206 can be used for transmitting and processing the signal output by the network device processor 201 . The receiver 205 can be used for receiving and processing the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 208 .
在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器206和接收器205可看作一个无线调制解调器。在网络设备100中,发射器206和接收器205的数量均可以是一个或者多个。天线208可用于将传输线中的电磁能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器207用于将天线208接收到的移动通信信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器205。In some embodiments of the present application, the transmitter 206 and the receiver 205 can be regarded as a wireless modem. In the network device 100, there may be one or more transmitters 206 and one or more receivers 205 . Antenna 208 may be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line to electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space to electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. The coupler 207 is used to divide the mobile communication signals received by the antenna 208 into multiple paths and distribute them to multiple receivers 205 .
存储器202与网络设备处理器201耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体地, 存储器202可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器202可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。The memory 202 is coupled with the network device processor 201 and is used for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. Specifically, the memory 202 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. The memory 202 can store a network communication program, which can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, and one or more network devices.
在本申请的一些实施例中,存储器202可用于存储本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的波束成形方法在网络设备100侧的实现程序。关于本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的波束成形方法的实现,请参考上述实施例。In some embodiments of the present application, the memory 202 may be used to store an implementation program of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the side of the network device 100 . For implementation of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, please refer to the foregoing embodiments.
网络设备处理器201可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体地,网络设备处理器201可用于调用存储于存储器202中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的波束成形方法在网络设备100侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。The network device processor 201 is operable to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the network device processor 201 can be used to call the program stored in the memory 202, such as the implementation program of the beamforming method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the network device 100 side, and execute the instructions contained in the program .
需要说明的是,图11所示的网络设备100仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,网络设备100还可以包括更多或更少的部件,在此不作限定。It should be noted that the network device 100 shown in FIG. 11 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the network device 100 may include more or fewer components, which is not limited here.
其中,网络设备100的结构可以与网络设备100的结构相同,关于网络设备100的结构相关内容可以参照图11所示的网络设备100的结构的相关文字描述,在此不再赘述。Wherein, the structure of the network device 100 may be the same as that of the network device 100 , and related content about the structure of the network device 100 may refer to the related text description of the structure of the network device 100 shown in FIG. 11 , which will not be repeated here.
本申请的各实施方式可以任意进行组合,以实现不同的技术效果。Various implementation modes of the present application can be combined arbitrarily to achieve different technical effects.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请所述的流程或功能。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments are realized. The processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware. The programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media. When the programs are executed , may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments. The aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种波束成形方法,其特征在于,应用于终端,所述终端包括A个发送TX通道,所述A个TX通道对应Y根天线,A和Y为正整数,所述方法包括:A beamforming method, characterized in that it is applied to a terminal, the terminal includes A transmission TX channels, the A TX channels correspond to Y antennas, A and Y are positive integers, and the method includes:
    所述终端通过所述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS,所述AS-SRS用于所述网络设备估计所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵;The terminal polls the network device with a single antenna through the Y antennas to transmit the AS-SRS to the network device, and the AS-SRS is used by the network device to estimate the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas ;
    所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息,所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息是所述网络设备基于所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵确定的;The terminal receives the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, and the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode is determined by the network device based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas;
    所述终端基于所述HBF配置信息,确定上行的目标发送方式。The terminal determines an uplink target transmission mode based on the HBF configuration information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述HBF配置信息用于指示:在所述目标发送方式下,所述A个TX通道中上行发送的B个TX通道、所述B个TX通道的数字波束成形DBF的数字移相值、所述B个TX通道中第一TX通道对应的C根天线中上行发送的D根天线和/或所述D根天线的模拟波束成形ABF的模拟移相值,所述第一TX通道是所述B个TX通道中的任一TX通道,B、C和D为正整数。The method according to claim 1, wherein the HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the B TX channels for uplink transmission among the A TX channels, the B TX channels The digital phase shift value of the digital beamforming DBF of the channel, the D antennas for uplink transmission among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel among the B TX channels, and/or the simulation of the analog beamforming ABF of the D antennas Phase shift value, the first TX channel is any one of the B TX channels, and B, C, and D are positive integers.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端通过所述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that, before the terminal polls the network equipment with a single antenna through the Y antennas and transmits the AS-SRS in turn, the terminal further includes:
    所述终端向所述网络设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于上报所述终端的TX通道和天线配置,所述终端的TX通道和天线配置用于所述网络设备确定所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。The terminal sends a first message to the network device, the first message is used to report the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal, and the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal are used by the network device to determine the target HBF configuration information of the sending method.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端通过所述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS之前,还包括:The method according to claim 3, characterized in that, before the terminal polls the network equipment with a single antenna through the Y antennas and transmits the AS-SRS in turn, the terminal further includes:
    所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的所述终端的AS-SRS资源的配置信息,所述AS-SRS资源的配置信息是所述网络设备基于所述终端的TX通道和天线配置确定的;The terminal receives configuration information of AS-SRS resources of the terminal sent by the network device, where the configuration information of the AS-SRS resources is determined by the network device based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal;
    所述终端通过所述Y根天线向网络设备单天线地轮询发送天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS,具体包括:The terminal sends the AS-SRS to the network device in a single-antenna polling manner through the Y antennas, which specifically includes:
    所述终端在所述AS-SRS资源上通过所述Y根天线向所述网络设备单天线地轮询发送AS-SRS。The terminal polls and sends the AS-SRS to the network device with a single antenna through the Y antennas on the AS-SRS resource.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein before the terminal receives the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, it further includes:
    所述终端向所述网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于上报所述终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,所述各TX通道支持的最大发送功率用于所述网络设备确定所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。The terminal sends a second message to the network device, the second message is used to report the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal, and the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel is used by the network device Determine the HBF configuration information of the target sending mode.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein before the terminal receives the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode sent by the network device, it further includes:
    所述终端向所述网络设备发送第三消息,所述第三消息用于上报所述终端支持的移相档位,所述终端支持的移相档位用于所述网络设备确定所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息,所 述移相档位包括ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。The terminal sends a third message to the network device, the third message is used to report the phase shift gear supported by the terminal, and the phase shift gear supported by the terminal is used by the network device to determine the target HBF configuration information in a sending mode, the phase shifting gears include ABF phase shifting gears and/or DBF phase shifting gears.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵、所述终端的TX通道和天线配置、所述终端支持的移相档位以及所述终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,用于所述网络设备确定所述终端的各种上行发送方式下的等效信道增益,等效信道增益最大的上行发送方式为所述终端的目标发送方式。The method according to claim 6, wherein the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, the TX channels and antenna configurations of the terminal, the phase shifting gears supported by the terminal, and the TX channels of the terminal The maximum transmission power supported by the channel is used by the network device to determine the equivalent channel gain of the terminal in various uplink transmission modes, and the uplink transmission mode with the largest equivalent channel gain is the target transmission mode of the terminal.
  8. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种TX通道和天线配置的配置类型,所述第一消息携带所述终端的TX通道和天线配置的配置类型的索引。The method according to claim 3, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the first message carries the TX channel and antenna of the terminal Index of the configured configuration type.
  9. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种所述A个TX通道的功率能力类型,所述第二消息携带所述终端的功率能力类型的索引。The method according to claim 5, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the A TX channels, and the second message carries the power capability of the terminal type index.
  10. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位的移相精度,所述第三消息携带所述终端的移相档位的移相精度,所述移相档位的移相精度包括ABF移相档位的移相精度和/或DBF移相档位的移相精度。The method according to claim 6, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase shifting accuracies of phase shifting gears, and the third message carries the phase shifting gears of the terminal The phase shifting precision of the phase shifting gear includes the phase shifting precision of the ABF phase shifting gear and/or the phase shifting precision of the DBF phase shifting gear.
  11. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位类型,所述第三消息携带所述终端的移相档位类型的索引,所述移相档位类型的索引包括ABF移相档位类型的索引和/或DBF移相档位类型的索引。The method according to claim 6, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two types of phase-shifting gears, and the third message carries an index of the phase-shifting gear type of the terminal , the index of the phase shift gear type includes the index of the ABF phase shift gear type and/or the index of the DBF phase shift gear type.
  12. 一种波束成形方法,其特征在于,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A beamforming method, characterized in that it is applied to a network device, the method comprising:
    所述网络设备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的所述天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS,所述终端包括A个发送TX通道,所述A个TX通道对应所述Y根天线,A和Y为正整数;The network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the antenna polling and sending by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, and the terminal includes A transmission TX channels, and the A TX channels correspond to the Y antennas. Antenna, A and Y are positive integers;
    所述网络设备基于所述Y根天线中的第一天线发送的AS-SRS,估计所述第一天线对应的上行信道矩阵,所述第一天线是所述Y根天线中的任一天线;The network device estimates an uplink channel matrix corresponding to the first antenna based on the AS-SRS sent by the first antenna in the Y antennas, where the first antenna is any antenna in the Y antennas;
    所述网络设备基于估计的所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定所述终端的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息;The network device determines hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the terminal's target transmission mode based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas;
    所述网络设备向所述终端发送所述HBF配置信息。The network device sends the HBF configuration information to the terminal.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述HBF配置信息用于指示:在所述目标发送方式下,所述A个TX通道中上行发送的B个TX通道、所述B个TX通道的数字波束成形DBF数字移相值、所述B个TX通道中第一TX通道对应的C根天线中上行发送的D根天线和/或所述D根天线的模拟波束成形ABF模拟移相值,所述第一TX通道是所述B个TX通道中的任一TX通道,B、C和D为正整数。The method according to claim 12, wherein the HBF configuration information is used to indicate: in the target transmission mode, the B TX channels for uplink transmission among the A TX channels, the B TX channels The digital beamforming DBF digital phase shift value of the channel, the D antennas for uplink transmission among the C antennas corresponding to the first TX channel among the B TX channels, and/or the analog beamforming ABF analog phase shift of the D antennas value, the first TX channel is any one of the B TX channels, and B, C, and D are positive integers.
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的所述天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS之前,还包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein, before the network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, it further includes:
    所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的第一消息;The network device receives the first message sent by the terminal;
    所述网络设备基于所述第一消息确定所述终端的TX通道和天线配置,所述终端的TX通道和天线配置用于所述网络设备确定所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。The network device determines the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal based on the first message, and the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal are used by the network device to determine HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的所述天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS之前,还包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein, before the network equipment receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through Y antenna single-antenna polling, it further includes:
    所述网络设备基于所述终端的TX通道和天线配置确定所述终端的AS-SRS资源的配置信息;The network device determines configuration information of AS-SRS resources of the terminal based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal;
    所述网络设备向所述终端发送所述AS-SRS资源的配置信息;The network device sends configuration information of the AS-SRS resource to the terminal;
    所述网络设备接收终端通过Y根天线单天线地轮询发送的所述天线轮发探测参考信号AS-SRS,具体包括:The network device receives the antenna polling sent by the terminal through Y antennas with a single antenna to send the AS-SRS in turn, specifically including:
    所述网络设备接收所述终端在所述AS-SRS资源上通过所述Y根天线单天线地轮询发送AS-SRS。The network device receives the AS-SRS sent by the terminal through single-antenna polling of the Y antennas on the AS-SRS resource.
  16. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备基于估计的所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定所述终端的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein, before the network device determines the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, further comprising: :
    所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的第二消息;The network device receives the second message sent by the terminal;
    所述网络设备基于所述第二消息确定所述终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,所述各TX通道支持的最大发送功率用于所述网络设备确定所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。The network device determines the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal based on the second message, and the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode .
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备基于估计的所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定所述终端的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein, before the network device determines the hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, it further includes :
    所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的第三消息;The network device receives the third message sent by the terminal;
    所述网络设备基于所述第三消息确定所述终端支持的移相档位,所述终端支持的移相档位用于所述网络设备确定所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息,所述移相档位包括ABF移相档位和/或DBF移相档位。The network device determines the phase shifting gear supported by the terminal based on the third message, the phase shifting gear supported by the terminal is used by the network device to determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode, and the shifting The phase gears include ABF phase shift gears and/or DBF phase shift gears.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备基于估计的所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定所述终端的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息,具体包括:The method according to claim 17, wherein the network device determines hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, specifically comprising:
    基于估计的所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵、所述终端的TX通道和天线配置、所述终端支持的移相档位以及所述终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率,确定所述终端的各种上行发送方式下的等效信道增益,并确定等效信道增益最大的上行发送方式为所述终端的目标发送方式,获取所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。Determine the Equivalent channel gains in various uplink transmission modes of the terminal, and determine the uplink transmission mode with the largest equivalent channel gain as the target transmission mode of the terminal, and acquire HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备基于估计的所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,确定所述终端的目标发送方式的混合波束成形HBF配置信息,具体包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein the network device determines hybrid beamforming HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the estimated uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas, specifically comprising:
    所述网络设备基于所述终端的TX通道和天线配置以及所述终端支持的移相档位,确定适用于所述终端的第一码本集;所述第一码本集包括Y个码字,所述第一码本集的每个码字的第y个码元用于表征所述Y根天线中的第y根天线对应的HBF权值;The network device determines a first codebook set applicable to the terminal based on the TX channel and antenna configuration of the terminal and the phase shift gear supported by the terminal; the first codebook set includes Y codewords , the yth symbol of each codeword in the first codebook set is used to represent the HBF weight corresponding to the yth antenna among the Y antennas;
    基于所述终端的各TX通道支持的最大发送功率对所述第一码本集进行功率修正,获得修正后的第二码本集,所述第二码本集的每个码字对应的发送总功率小于等于所述终端支持的最大发送功率,所述第二码本集的每个码字中第一TX通道的C根天线对应的C个码元的发送功率之和小于等于所述第一TX通道支持的最大发送功率,所述第二码本集的每个码字用于指示所述终端的一种上行发送方式;Perform power correction on the first codebook set based on the maximum transmit power supported by each TX channel of the terminal to obtain a corrected second codebook set, where each codeword in the second codebook set corresponds to the transmission The total power is less than or equal to the maximum transmission power supported by the terminal, and the sum of the transmission powers of the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel in each codeword of the second codebook set is less than or equal to the first The maximum transmission power supported by a TX channel, where each codeword in the second codebook set is used to indicate an uplink transmission mode of the terminal;
    基于所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵,获取所述第二码本集中每个码字对应的等效信道增益;Obtain an equivalent channel gain corresponding to each codeword in the second codebook set based on the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the Y antennas;
    基于所述第二码本集中等效信道增益最大的第一码字确定所述终端的所述目标发送方式的HBF配置信息。Determine the HBF configuration information of the target transmission mode of the terminal based on the first codeword with the largest equivalent channel gain in the second codebook set.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一TX通道的C根天线对应的C个码元间的相位差为所述终端支持的ABF的移相档位,当所述A个TX通道还包括第二TX通道时,所述第一TX通道和所述第二YX通道的第一根天线对应的两个码元的相位差为所述终端支持的DBF的移相档位。The method according to claim 19, wherein the phase difference between the C symbols corresponding to the C antennas of the first TX channel is the phase shifting gear of the ABF supported by the terminal, when the A When a TX channel also includes a second TX channel, the phase difference between the two symbols corresponding to the first antenna of the first TX channel and the second YX channel is the phase shifting gear of the DBF supported by the terminal .
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,码字对应的等效信道增益为码字与所述Y根天线对应的上行信道矩阵的乘积向量的模平方。The method according to claim 19, wherein the equivalent channel gain corresponding to the codeword is the square of a product vector of the uplink channel matrix corresponding to the codeword and the Y antennas.
  22. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种TX通道和天线配置的配置类型,所述第一消息携带所述终端的TX通道和天线配置的配置类型的索引。The method according to claim 14, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two configuration types of TX channel and antenna configuration, and the first message carries the TX channel and antenna of the terminal Index of the configured configuration type.
  23. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种所述A个TX通道的功率能力类型,所述第二消息携带所述终端的功率能力类型的索引。The method according to claim 16, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two power capability types of the A TX channels, and the second message carries the power capability of the terminal type index.
  24. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位的移相精度,所述第三消息携带所述终端的移相档位的移相精度,所述移相档位的移相精度包括ABF移相档位的移相精度和/或DBF移相档位的移相精度。The method according to claim 17, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two phase shifting precisions of phase shifting gears, and the third message carries the phase shifting gears of the terminal The phase shifting precision of the phase shifting gear includes the phase shifting precision of the ABF phase shifting gear and/or the phase shifting precision of the DBF phase shifting gear.
  25. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端和所述网络设备预定义了至少两种移相档位类型的索引,第三消息携带所述终端的移相档位类型的索引,所述移相档位的索引包括ABF移相档位的索引和/或DBF移相档位的索引。The method according to claim 17, wherein the terminal and the network device predefine at least two indexes of phase shifting gear types, and the third message carries the index of the phase shifting gear type of the terminal , the index of the phase shifting gear includes the index of the ABF phase shifting gear and/or the index of the DBF phase shifting gear.
  26. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述终端配置2个TX通道和4根天线,所述ABF移相档位和所述DBF移相档位的移相精度均为90°时,所述第一码本集为四端口的上行预编码矩阵指示TPMI码本;The method according to claim 19, wherein when the terminal is configured with 2 TX channels and 4 antennas, the phase shifting accuracy of the ABF phase shifting gear and the DBF phase shifting gear are both 90° , the first codebook set is a four-port uplink precoding matrix indicating a TPMI codebook;
    当所述终端配置1个TX通道和4根天线,所述ABF移相档位和所述DBF移相档位的 移相精度均为90°时,所述第一码本集为四端口的TPMI码本;When the terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 4 antennas, and the phase shift accuracy of the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear are both 90°, the first codebook set is a four-port TPMI codebook;
    当所述终端配置1个TX通道和2根天线,所述ABF移相档位和所述DBF移相档位的移相精度均为90°时,所述第一码本集为两端口的TPMI码本。When the terminal is configured with 1 TX channel and 2 antennas, and the phase shift accuracy of the ABF phase-shifting gear and the DBF phase-shifting gear are both 90°, the first codebook set is a two-port TPMI codebook.
  27. 一种终端,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器和所述处理器电偶合,所述存储器用于存储程序指令,所述处理器被配置用于调用所述存储器存储的全部或部分程序指令,执行如权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法。A terminal, characterized in that it includes a memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are electrically coupled, the memory is used to store program instructions, and the processor is configured to call all or Part of the program instructions execute the method according to any one of claims 1-11.
  28. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器和所述处理器电偶合,所述存储器用于存储程序指令,所述处理器被配置用于调用所述存储器存储的全部或部分程序指令,执行如权利要求12-26任一项所述的方法。A network device, characterized in that it includes a memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are electrically coupled, the memory is used to store program instructions, and the processor is configured to call all stored in the memory Or part of the program instructions to execute the method according to any one of claims 12-26.
  29. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-11或12-26任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized by comprising computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-11 or 12-26.
  30. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-11或12-26任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-11 or 12-26.
PCT/CN2022/091684 2021-05-21 2022-05-09 Beamforming method and related apparatus WO2022242489A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110558386.8 2021-05-21
CN202110558386.8A CN115379470A (en) 2021-05-21 2021-05-21 Beam forming method and related device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022242489A1 true WO2022242489A1 (en) 2022-11-24

Family

ID=84059161

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/091684 WO2022242489A1 (en) 2021-05-21 2022-05-09 Beamforming method and related apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115379470A (en)
WO (1) WO2022242489A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
RU2811989C1 (en) * 2023-10-18 2024-01-22 Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд. Device and method for forming a directive pattern for download data transmission in a wireless communication system

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106033989A (en) * 2015-03-12 2016-10-19 电信科学技术研究院 Hybrid beam forming transmission method and network device
CN107959937A (en) * 2016-10-17 2018-04-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The definite of transmission mode, data transmission method and device, communication system
CN108476054A (en) * 2016-01-21 2018-08-31 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Mixed-beam shaping method, base station and user terminal
US20180269953A1 (en) * 2015-10-07 2018-09-20 Lg Electronics Inc. Beam scanning method of terminal for hybrid beam forming in wireless communication system, and device for same

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2351246B1 (en) * 2008-11-03 2017-02-22 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Method for transmission of reference signals and determination of precoding matrices for multi-antenna transmission
CN111095809A (en) * 2017-09-29 2020-05-01 华为技术有限公司 Measurement method, network equipment and terminal equipment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106033989A (en) * 2015-03-12 2016-10-19 电信科学技术研究院 Hybrid beam forming transmission method and network device
US20180269953A1 (en) * 2015-10-07 2018-09-20 Lg Electronics Inc. Beam scanning method of terminal for hybrid beam forming in wireless communication system, and device for same
CN108476054A (en) * 2016-01-21 2018-08-31 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Mixed-beam shaping method, base station and user terminal
CN107959937A (en) * 2016-10-17 2018-04-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The definite of transmission mode, data transmission method and device, communication system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NTT DOCOMO: "Hybrid Beamforming for NR", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1700598 HYBRID BEAMFORMING FOR NR, vol. RAN WG1, 10 January 2017 (2017-01-10), Spokane, USA, pages 1 - 7, XP051202981 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
RU2811989C1 (en) * 2023-10-18 2024-01-22 Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд. Device and method for forming a directive pattern for download data transmission in a wireless communication system
RU2817678C1 (en) * 2023-11-23 2024-04-18 Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд. Device and method of beamforming for uplink reception

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115379470A (en) 2022-11-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11522597B2 (en) Beam information feedback method and apparatus, and configuration information feedback method and apparatus
US20200367226A1 (en) Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving beam information in wireless communication system
CN109997313B (en) Method for uplink transmission
CN108631831B (en) Information transmission method and equipment
EP3637838A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
CN108809386B (en) Indication method and device for transmitting precoding matrix
CN112543083B (en) Uplink data transmission method and device
US10644773B2 (en) Feedback channel information using pre-coders in a wireless communication system
JP6665101B2 (en) Dual stream beamforming method and apparatus
EP3522387A1 (en) Method and device for scanning and switching wave beam
US10263673B2 (en) Signal transmission method and device
CN109391305B (en) Communication processing method and device
US11626911B2 (en) Flexible beamforming control
WO2018149346A1 (en) Doa determining method, method for use in doa determining, access network device, and terminal
WO2018171786A1 (en) Information transmission method and device
AU2019443559B2 (en) Transmission of reference signals from a terminal device
WO2022242489A1 (en) Beamforming method and related apparatus
EP4319253A1 (en) Channel phase correction method and related apparatus
CN108886425B (en) Method for feeding back mixed channel state information, terminal equipment and base station
EP3928437A1 (en) Transmission of reference signals from a terminal device
US20210258052A1 (en) Method and apparatus for sending signal, method and apparatus for reporting channel state information, and storage medium
EP3526908B1 (en) Relative uplink channel estimation
EP4366186A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus
US20240204844A1 (en) Information feedback method and related apparatus
CN115225126A (en) Uplink transmission method, ABF module, terminal and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22803812

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22803812

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1